country version india

316
COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN) Contents J81 - Procurement of Stock Materials..................................8 1 Purpose............................................................8 2 Preparation........................................................8 2.1 Prerequisites.................................................8 3 Configuration of Taxation for Procurement Process..................8 3.1 Basic Settings................................................8 3.1.1 Maintaining Excise Registrations............................8 3.1.2 Maintaining Plant Settings for Excise Information..........11 3.1.3 Maintaining Excise Groups..................................12 3.1.4 Maintaining Series Groups..................................14 3.2 Determination of Excise Duty.................................16 3.2.1 Maintaining Excise Defaults................................16 3.2.2 Maintaining Excise Accounts per Excise Transactions........17 3.2.3 Assigning G/L Accounts to Excise Transaction Types.........20 3.3 Transactions: Incoming Excise Invoices.......................24 3.3.1 Selecting Fields...........................................24 3.3.2 Defining Processing Modes per Transaction..................24 3.3.3 Defining Reference Documents per Transaction...............27 3.3.4 Maintaining Rejection Codes................................35 3.3.5 Maintaining Movement Types Involve Excise Invoice..........36 3.3.6 Utilization Determination..................................38 3.3.7 Excise Registers...........................................39 3.4 Business Transactions: Tools.................................40 3.4.1 Number Ranges..............................................40 3.4.2 Long Texts.................................................42 3.4.3 Message Control............................................43 4 Master Data Creation..............................................43 4.1 Materials Master – Raw Materials creation....................44 4.2 Materials Master – Packing Materials creation................44 4.3 Materials Master – Trading Materials creation................44 4.4 Materials Master – Finished Materials creation...............45 Page 1 of 316

Upload: rahulmirashi

Post on 28-Nov-2014

108 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

ContentsJ81 - Procurement of Stock Materials.............................................................................................8

1 Purpose................................................................................................................................... 8

2 Preparation.............................................................................................................................. 8

2.1 Prerequisites..................................................................................................................8

3 Configuration of Taxation for Procurement Process................................................................8

3.1 Basic Settings................................................................................................................8

3.1.1 Maintaining Excise Registrations...............................................................................8

3.1.2 Maintaining Plant Settings for Excise Information...................................................11

3.1.3 Maintaining Excise Groups......................................................................................12

3.1.4 Maintaining Series Groups......................................................................................14

3.2 Determination of Excise Duty......................................................................................16

3.2.1 Maintaining Excise Defaults....................................................................................16

3.2.2 Maintaining Excise Accounts per Excise Transactions............................................17

3.2.3 Assigning G/L Accounts to Excise Transaction Types............................................20

3.3 Transactions: Incoming Excise Invoices......................................................................24

3.3.1 Selecting Fields.......................................................................................................24

3.3.2 Defining Processing Modes per Transaction...........................................................24

3.3.3 Defining Reference Documents per Transaction.....................................................27

3.3.4 Maintaining Rejection Codes...................................................................................35

3.3.5 Maintaining Movement Types Involve Excise Invoice.............................................36

3.3.6 Utilization Determination..........................................................................................38

3.3.7 Excise Registers......................................................................................................39

3.4 Business Transactions: Tools......................................................................................40

3.4.1 Number Ranges......................................................................................................40

3.4.2 Long Texts...............................................................................................................42

3.4.3 Message Control.....................................................................................................43

4 Master Data Creation.............................................................................................................43

4.1 Materials Master – Raw Materials creation..................................................................44

4.2 Materials Master – Packing Materials creation............................................................44

4.3 Materials Master – Trading Materials creation.............................................................44

4.4 Materials Master – Finished Materials creation...........................................................45

4.5 Vendor Master Creation...............................................................................................45

4.6 CIN Master Data – Chapter ID.....................................................................................45

4.7 CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination...........................................46

4.8 CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination................................................................46

Page 1 of 254

Page 2: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)4.9 CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details...................................................................47

4.10 CIN Master Data – SSI Rates......................................................................................47

4.11 CIN Master Data – Excise Indicator for Plant..............................................................47

4.12 CIN Master Data – Excise Indicator for Plant and Vendor...........................................48

4.13 CIN Master Data – Excise Tax Rate............................................................................48

4.14 Creating Batch Search Strategy SD............................................................................49

4.15 Quality Inspection Plan Maintaining.............................................................................49

J82 – Procurement of External Services: Configuration Guide.....................................................52

5 Purpose................................................................................................................................. 52

6 Preparation............................................................................................................................ 52

6.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................52

7 Procurement of External Services.........................................................................................52

7.1 Procurement of External Services – Basic Settings.....................................................52

7.1.1 Tax Code Creation for Service Tax.........................................................................52

7.2 Output Condition Record for Purchase Order..............................................................53

7.3 Output Condition Record for Service Entry Sheet.......................................................54

7.4 Extended Withholding Tax – Basic Settings................................................................55

7.4.1 Checking Withholding Tax Countries......................................................................55

7.4.2 Defining Official Withholding Tax Codes.................................................................56

7.4.3 Defining Reasons for Exemption.............................................................................57

7.5 Defining Business Place..............................................................................................57

7.6 Defining Section Code.................................................................................................58

7.7 Maintaining Factory Calendar to Section Code...........................................................59

7.8 Extended Withholding Tax - Calculation......................................................................60

7.8.1 Defining Withholding Tax Type for Invoice Posting.................................................60

7.8.2 Defining Withholding Tax Types for Payment Posting.............................................66

7.8.3 Defining Rounding Rule for Withholding Tax Types................................................68

7.8.4 Defining Withholding Tax Codes.............................................................................69

7.8.5 Checking Recipient Types.......................................................................................71

7.8.6 Maintaining Tax Due Dates.....................................................................................72

7.8.7 Maintaining Surcharge Rates..................................................................................72

7.8.8 Assigning Types of Companies to Withholding Tax Codes.....................................73

7.9 Extended Withholding Tax – Company Code Assignment..........................................74

7.9.1 Assigning Withholding Tax Type to Company Code...............................................74

7.9.2 Activating Extended Withholding Tax Code.............................................................75

7.9.3 Defining Accounts to post the Withholding Tax.......................................................76

7.10 Maintaining Number Group for Internal Challan Numbers...........................................77

Page 2 of 254

Page 3: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)7.11 Assignment of Number Ranges...................................................................................78

7.11.1 Assigning Number Ranges to Number Groups.......................................................78

7.11.2 Maintaining Number Ranges...................................................................................79

7.11.3 Maintaining Number Groups and SAP Script Forms...............................................80

7.11.4 Assigning Number Ranges to Number Groups.......................................................80

7.11.5 Maintaining Number Ranges...................................................................................81

8 Configuration CATTs.............................................................................................................82

8.1 Maintaining Address for Business Place......................................................................82

8.2 Maintaining Address for Section Code........................................................................82

8.3 Import of Tax Codes objects list..................................................................................83

9 Master Data........................................................................................................................... 83

9.1 Creating Service Master..............................................................................................83

9.2 Creating Vendor Master...............................................................................................83

J83 - Procurement of Imported Materials: Installation Guide........................................................86

10 Purpose.............................................................................................................................. 86

11 Preparation........................................................................................................................ 86

11.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................86

11.2 Uploading the Installation Role....................................................................................86

12 Installation.......................................................................................................................... 87

12.1 Master Data Creation..................................................................................................87

12.1.1 Materials Master Creation.......................................................................................87

12.1.2 Vendor Master Creation..........................................................................................88

12.1.3 CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination.......................................88

12.1.4 CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination............................................................89

12.1.5 CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details...............................................................89

Procurement of Capital Material to Manufacturing Plant...............................................................91

13 Purpose.............................................................................................................................. 91

14 Preparation........................................................................................................................ 91

14.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................91

15 Configuration...................................................................................................................... 92

15.1 Release Procedure for Purchase Orders.....................................................................92

15.1.1 Creating Characteristic............................................................................................92

15.1.2 Creating Class.........................................................................................................93

15.1.3 Defining the Release Procedure for Purchase Orders............................................94

15.1.4 Assigning Values to Release Procedure.................................................................96

15.2 Master Data................................................................................................................. 97

15.2.1 Creating Materials Master.......................................................................................97

Page 3 of 254

Page 4: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)15.2.2 Creating Vendor Master..........................................................................................97

15.2.3 Creating CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination........................97

15.2.4 Creating CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination.............................................98

15.2.5 Creating CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details................................................98

J85 - Subcontracting without Payment of Excise Duty................................................................101

16 Purpose............................................................................................................................ 101

17 Preparation...................................................................................................................... 101

17.1 Prerequisites..............................................................................................................101

18 Subcontracting without Payment of Excise Duty..............................................................101

18.1 Business Transactions Settings.................................................................................101

18.1.1 Subcontracting Attributes......................................................................................101

18.1.2 Maintaining Movement Type Groups.....................................................................103

18.2 Output Determination................................................................................................104

18.2.1 Maintaining Access Sequence for Subcontracting Challan...................................104

18.2.2 Maintaining Output Types for Subcontracting Challan..........................................105

18.2.3 Maintaining Output Determination Procedure........................................................106

18.2.4 Printer Determination by Plant / Storage Location.................................................107

18.3 Maintaining Output Conditions Record......................................................................108

19 Master Data.....................................................................................................................109

19.1 Materials Master Creation..........................................................................................109

19.2 Vendor Master Creation.............................................................................................109

19.3 CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination.........................................110

19.4 CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination..............................................................110

19.5 CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details.................................................................111

J86 - Procurement of Trading Materials......................................................................................113

20 Purpose............................................................................................................................ 113

21 Preparation...................................................................................................................... 113

21.1 Prerequisites..............................................................................................................113

22 Procurement of Trading Materials....................................................................................113

22.1 Master Data...............................................................................................................113

22.1.1 Materials Master Creation.....................................................................................113

22.1.2 Vendor Master Creation........................................................................................113

J91 – Export Sales under Bond..................................................................................................116

23 Purpose............................................................................................................................ 116

24 Preparation...................................................................................................................... 116

24.1 Prerequisites..............................................................................................................116

25 Configuration....................................................................................................................116

Page 4 of 254

Page 5: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)25.1 Configuration of Export Sales under Bond.................................................................116

25.1.1 Assigning Billing Types to Delivery Types.............................................................116

25.1.2 Maintaining Number Range for Excise Bond.........................................................117

25.1.3 Making Settings for ARE-1 Procedure...................................................................118

25.1.4 Maintaining Number Range for ARE-1..................................................................119

25.1.5 Defining Processing Modes per Transaction.........................................................120

25.1.6 Defining Reference Documents per Transaction...................................................121

25.1.7 Maintaining Access sequences.............................................................................122

25.1.8 Maintaining Output Type.......................................................................................123

25.1.9 Specifying Printers................................................................................................126

25.2 Manual Activity..........................................................................................................127

25.2.1 Importing Form in to the Client..............................................................................127

25.3 Master Data...............................................................................................................128

25.3.1 Maintaining Settings for J1IB.................................................................................128

25.3.2 Maintaining Postal Address...................................................................................128

25.3.3 Maintaining Rejection Codes.................................................................................129

25.3.4 Creating Customer Master....................................................................................129

25.3.5 Customer CIN details............................................................................................129

25.3.6 Sales Views for Material master in New Sales Organization.................................130

25.3.7 Pricing Conditions.................................................................................................130

25.3.8 Tax Conditions......................................................................................................131

25.3.9 Condition record for Output...................................................................................131

J92 - Stock Transfer between Plants..........................................................................................133

26 Purpose............................................................................................................................ 133

27 Preparation...................................................................................................................... 133

27.1 Prerequisites..............................................................................................................133

28 Stock Transfer between Plants........................................................................................133

28.1 Master Data Setup for Stock Transport Order...........................................................133

28.1.1 Customer Master for BP01 and BP02...................................................................133

28.1.2 Vendor Master for BP01 and BP02.......................................................................134

28.1.3 Customer CIN Details............................................................................................134

28.1.4 Vendor CIN Details................................................................................................134

28.2 Stock Transferring between Plants............................................................................135

28.2.1 Setting up Stock Transport Order..........................................................................135

28.2.2 Outputting Condition Record for Stock Transport Order........................................138

28.2.3 Assigning Billing Types to Delivery Types.............................................................139

28.3 Master Data...............................................................................................................140

Page 5 of 254

Page 6: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)28.3.1 Creating Customer Master....................................................................................140

28.3.2 Sales Views for Material Master in New Plant.......................................................140

28.3.3 Pricing Conditions.................................................................................................140

28.3.4 Tax Conditions......................................................................................................141

28.3.5 Condition Record for Output..................................................................................141

J94 - Excise Periodic Processing................................................................................................143

J94 - Excise Periodic Processing................................................................................................143

28.3.6 Prerequisites.........................................................................................................143

28.4 1 Excise Periodic Transactions..................................................................................143

28.4.1 1.1 TR6 Challan Posting with PLA Register Updation...........................................143

28.4.2 1.2 Utilization of CENVAT....................................................................................146

28.5 2 Excise Report.........................................................................................................150

28.5.1 2.1 CENVAT Register...........................................................................................150

28.6 3 Excise Register Updation.......................................................................................152

28.6.1 3.1 Updation of RG1 Register..............................................................................152

28.6.2 3.2 RG1 Register Extraction..................................................................................155

28.6.3 3.3 RG1 Register Print Utility.................................................................................156

28.6.4 3.2 PLA Register Extraction..................................................................................157

28.6.5 3.3 PLA Register Print Utility.................................................................................159

28.6.6 3.3 Register RT- 12...............................................................................................160

29 FAQ.................................................................................................................................. 202

29.1 General...................................................................................................................... 202

29.2 CIN Basis................................................................................................................... 203

29.3 CIN MM..................................................................................................................... 206

29.3.1 Customization........................................................................................................206

29.3.2 Procurement..........................................................................................................208

29.3.3 Subcontracting......................................................................................................213

29.4 CIN SD...................................................................................................................... 214

29.5 CIN FI........................................................................................................................ 223

30 User-Exits........................................................................................................................ 226

30.1 TDS........................................................................................................................... 226

30.2 SubContracting..........................................................................................................226

30.3 Depot......................................................................................................................... 226

30.4 Excise Invoice............................................................................................................227

31 Business Transaction Events (Open-FI).........................................................................228

31.1 Publish/Subscribe interfaces.....................................................................................229

31.2 Process Interfaces.....................................................................................................230

Page 6 of 254

Page 7: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)32 Customization..................................................................................................................231

32.1 Pre Delivered R3 customization................................................................................231

32.1.1 SCM...................................................................................................................... 231

32.1.2 Financials..............................................................................................................232

33 Pricing.............................................................................................................................. 235

33.1 CIN Pricing................................................................................................................235

33.2 CIN Formulae............................................................................................................241

34 Configurable Messages...................................................................................................246

35 CIN Transaction Data.......................................................................................................248

36 Security............................................................................................................................ 250

36.1 Roles......................................................................................................................... 251

36.1.1 Master Roles.........................................................................................................251

36.1.2 CIN MM Roles.......................................................................................................252

36.1.3 CIN SD Roles........................................................................................................253

36.1.4 CIN FI Roles..........................................................................................................253

37 Important Notes................................................................................................................255

Page 7 of 254

Page 8: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

J81 - Procurement of Stock Materials

1 PurposeThe purpose of this document is to describe the general configuration steps required to manually set up the configuration within the system landscape.

The Configuration Guide describes how to set up the configuration of a Building Block manually, without the support of automated configuration tools. If you want to use BC Sets and CATT procedures for an automated installation process, refer to the Building Block Installation Guide of the Materials Management IN Building Block.

2 Preparation

2.1 PrerequisitesJ02 - Organizational elements building block installation

J03 – Financial Accounting building block installation

J04 – Sales and Distribution building block installation

J05 – Materials Management building block installation

J07 – Quality Management building block installation

J90 – Batch Management building block installation

3 Configuration of Taxation for Procurement Process

3.1 Basic Settings

3.1.1 Maintaining Excise Registrations

UseAs per the legal requirement every plant which is handling excisable goods has to be registered with Central Excise Authorities in India. In this configuration step you are going to see how to maintain Excise Registrations.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Basic Settings Maintain Excise Registrations

Page 8 of 254

Page 9: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

2. On the Excise Registrations: screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new excise registrations.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Excise Reg. Excise registration id

R 01

Reg. Description Title of registration ID

R BP01 MFG PLANT EXCISE REGISTRATION

ECC No. ECC Number R Enter ECC No. for example

ECC/1/1/2001

Excise Reg. No. Excise registration number

R Enter for example

REG-10001

Excise Range Excise Range R Enter for example

BANGALORE RANGE

Excise Division Excise Division R Enter for example

BANGALORE DIVISION

Commissionerate Commissionerate R Enter for example

KARNATAKA COMMISSIONARATE

Liable to AED Liability to Additional Excise Duty

R Check the tick box If you are covered under AED only

Liable to SED Liability to Special Excise Duty

R Check the tick box If you are covered under SED only

Liable to Cess Liability to Cess R Check the tick box If you are covered under CESS only

Partial credit Partial credit R Check the tick box

No of items in Excise Invoice

Number of items in Excise Invoice

R 2

4. Press enter complete the entries

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or press Control + S.

6. To maintain the entries for BP02 Depot Plant follow the steps mentioned above:

Page 9 of 254

Page 10: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)7. On the Excise Registrations: screen, make the following entries:

8. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new excise registrations

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Excise Reg. Excise registration id

R 02

Reg. Description Title of registration ID

R BP02 DEPOT PLANT EXCISE REGISTRATION

ECC No. ECC Number R Enter ECC No. for example

ECC/1/2/2001

Excise Reg. No. Excise registration number

R Enter for example

REG-20001

Excise Range Excise Range R Enter for example

MUMBAI RANGE

Excise Division Excise Division R Enter for example

MUMBAI DIVISION

Commissionerate Commissionerate R Enter for example

MAHARASTRA COMMISSIONARATE

Liable to AED Liability to Additional Excise Duty

R Check the tick box If you are covered under AED only

Liable to SED Liability to Special Excise Duty

R Check the tick box If you are covered under SED only

Liable to Cess Liability to Cess R Check the tick box If you are covered under CESS only

Partial credit Partial credit R Check the tick box

No of items in Excise Invoice

Number of items in Excise Invoice

R 2

9. Press enter complete the entries

10. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or press Control + S.

Result Data was saved.

Page 10 of 254

Page 11: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)3.1.2 Maintaining Plant Settings for Excise Information

UseAs per the legal requirement every plant which is handling excisable goods has to be registered with Central Excise Authorities in India. In this configuration step you are going to maintain Excise Information for plants.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Basic Settings Maintain Plant Settings

2. On the Plant Settings: screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Entries for BP01

Plant Plant code R BP01

Depot Depot O Leave it blank Do not check as BP01 is mfg plant.

Exc. Reg. Excise Registration id

O 01

GRs per EI Goods Receipts per each Excise Invoice

R Select Multiple Goods Receipts, Single Credits from drop down list

Entries for BP02

Plant Plant code R BP02

Depot Depot O Check the box Check as BP02 is a Depot plant.

Exc. Reg. Excise Registration id

O 02

GRs per EI Goods Receipts per each Excise Invoice

R Select Multiple Goods Receipts, Single Credits from drop down list

4. Press enter to finish the entries.

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or by pressing Control + S.

Result

Page 11 of 254

Page 12: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)Data was saved.

3.1.3 Maintaining Excise Groups

UseAs per the legal requirement in India each Excise Group has to have one set of books. In this step you are going to configure the Excise Groups for both the plants.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Basic Settings Maintain Excise Groups

2. On the Excise Groups: screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Entries for BP01

Excise Group Excise Group R 10

Plant Plant code R BP01

Description Description of group

R BP01 MFG PLANT EXCISE GROUP

Excise Reg. Excise Registration no.

R 01

No. of GR per EI Number of goods receipts per excise invoice

R Multiple Goods Receipts, Single Credits

Default Challan Qty in GR

Default challan quantity in goods receipt

O Tick this check box

Excise inv during Billing

Excise Invoice during billing

O Do not tick Leave blank

Create and post Inv single step

Crete and post Invoice in a single step

O Tick the box

Consumption Consumption entry in registers

O Check this tick box

Depot indicator Depot indicator O Do not check tick box

Folio number Folio numbers O Do not check tick box

Page 12 of 254

Page 13: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Depot Excise Invoice

Depot Excise Invoice

O Do not check tick box

EI Capture Excise Invoice capturing

O Check tick box

Post EI in MIGO Post excise invoice in MIGO

O Check tick box

Duty different at GR

Duty different at GR

O Check tick box

EI create/RG23D selection

Excise Invoice creation for RG23D register

O Check tick box

Update RG1 at MIGO

Update RG1 register at MIGO

O Check tick box

4. Press enter to finish the entries.

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or by pressing Control + S.

6. To maintain the Excise Group for BP02 depot plant, please repeat the steps mentioned above.

7. On the Excise Groups: screen, make the following entries:

8. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Entries for BP02

Excise Group Excise Group R 20

Plant Plant code R BP02

Description Description of group

R BP02 DEPOT PLANT EXCISE GROUP

Excise Reg. Excise Registration no.

R 02

No. of GR per EI Number of goods receipts per excise invoice

R Multiple Goods Receipts, Single Credits

Default Challan Qty in GR

Default challana quantity in goods receipt

O Tick this check box

Excise inv during Billing

Excise Invoice during billing

O Do not tick Leave blank

Create and post Inv single step

Crete and post Invoice in a single step

O Tick the box

Page 13 of 254

Page 14: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Consumption Consumption entry in registers

O Check this tick box

Depot indicator Depot indicator O Check tick box

Folio number Folio numbers O Check tick box

Depot Excise Invoice

Depot Excise Invoice

O Check tick box

EI Capture Excise Invoice capturing

O Check tick box

Post EI in MIGO Post excise invoice in MIGO

O Check tick box

Duty different at GR

Duty different at GR

O Check tick box

EI create/RG23D selection

Excise Invoice creation for RG23D register

O Check tick box

Update RG1 at MIGO

Update RG1 register at MIGO

O Check tick box

9. Press enter to finish the entries.

10. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or by pressing Control + S.

ResultData was saved.

3.1.4 Maintaining Series Groups

UseIn this IMG activity, you define the different excise series groups within your company. Series groups allow you to maintain multiple number ranges for the outgoing excise documents.

Based on excise regulations and exemptions from the authorities you can maintain multiple number series for outgoing documents. But each of these series has to be declared to the excise authorities.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Basic Settings Maintain Series Groups

Page 14 of 254

Page 15: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)2. On the Excise Document Series: screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Series Grp Series group R 11

Series Des Description of series group

R BP01 MFG PLANT DOMESTIC SERIES GROUP

Exc. Reg. Excise Registration

R 01

No utilization No utilization O Do not check tick box

Imm. Util. Immediate utilization

O Do not check tick box

Other fields leave blank

Series Grp Series group R 12

Series Des Description of series group

R BP01 MFG PLANT EXPORT SERIES GROUP

Exc. Reg. Excise Registration

R 01

No utilization No utilization O Do not check tick box

Imm. Util. Immediate utilization

O Do not check tick box

Address Address O Address =1

Other fields leave blank

Series Grp Series group R 21

Series Des Description of series group

R BP02 DEPOT PLANT SERIES GROUP

Exc. Reg. Excise Registration

R 02

No utilization No utilization O Do not check tick box

Imm. Util. Immediate utilization

O Do not check tick box

Other fields leave blank

4. Press enter to finish the entries.

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or by pressing Control + S.

Result

Page 15 of 254

Page 16: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)Data was saved.

3.2 Determination of Excise Duty

3.2.1 Maintaining Excise Defaults

UseIn this IMG activity, you define which tax procedure and pricing condition types are used in calculating excise taxes using formula-based excise determination.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Basic Settings Determination of Excise Duty Maintain Excise Defaults

2. On the Tax Default Information: screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Tax proc. Tax procedure R TAXINJ

CVD Cond. CVD condition type

R JCV1

Exp tax cd Expected Tax code

R A0

Tax jur.cd Tax jurisdiction code

R IN00

A/P BED Cond A/P BED condition type

R JMO1

A/P SED cond A/P SED Condition type

R JSO1

A/P AED cond A/P AED condition type

R JAO1

A/R BED cond A/R BED condition type

R JEX2

A/R SED cond A/R SED condition type

R JEXS

A/R AED cond A/R AED condition type

R JEXA

Page 16 of 254

Page 17: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

A/R CESS cond A/R CESS condition type

R JCES

BED perc BED percentage condition type

R JMOD

AED perc AED percentage condition type

R JAED

SED perc SED percentage condition type

R JSED

Cess per CESS percentage condition type

R JCED

4. Press enter complete the entries

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or press Control + S.

ResultData was saved.

3.2.2 Maintaining Excise Accounts per Excise Transactions

UseIn this IMG activity, you specify which excise accounts (for excise duty and CENVAT) are to be posted to for the various transaction types. Enter all the accounts that are affected by each transaction type.

If you use sub transaction types, enter the accounts for each sub transaction type as well.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Account Determination Specify Excise Accounts per Excise Transaction

2. On the Transaction Code Vs Accounts: screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries. As a default some entries already maintained. Do not disturb them; maintain additional entries as per the following table.

Excise TT Sub Transaction

D C Indicator Account name Note

Excise Transaction Type

Sub Transaction

Debit / Credit Indicator

Account name

57FC 01 Credit PLA BED Account

Page 17 of 254

Page 18: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)Excise TT Sub

TransactionD C Indicator Account name Note

Excise Transaction Type

Sub Transaction

Debit / Credit Indicator

Account name

57FC 01 Credit RG 23 BED Account

57FC 01 Debit CENVAT Clearing account

57NR 01 Credit CENVAT Clearing account

57NR 01 Credit PLA BED Account

57NR 01 Credit RG 23 BED Account

57NR 01 Debit CENVAT Clearance reversal account

The following SAP Standard settings are already maintained in system.

ETT Sub TrnTyp DC ind Acct nameExcise Transaction Type

Sub Transaction

Debit / Credit Indicator

Account name

57CM   Credit CENVAT Clearing account57CM   Debit RG 23 BED Account57FC   Credit PLA BED Account57FC   Credit RG 23 BED Account57FC   Debit CENVAT Clearing account57FC Credit PLA BED Account57FC Credit RG 23 BED Account57FC Debit CENVAT Clearing account57NR   Credit CENVAT Clearing account 57NR   Credit PLA BED Account57NR   Credit RG 23 BED Account57NR   Debit CENVAT Reversal Account57NR Credit CENVAT Clearing account 57NR Credit PLA BED Account57NR Credit RG 23 BED Account57NR Debit CENVAT Reversal AccountARE1   Credit CENVAT Clearing accountARE1   Credit PLA BED AccountARE1   Credit RG 23 BED AccountARE1   Debit CENVAT Reversal AccountARE3   Credit CENVAT Clearing accountARE3   Credit PLA BED AccountARE3   Credit RG 23 BED AccountARE3   Debit CENVAT Reversal AccountCAPE   Credit CENVAT on hold AccountCAPE   Debit CENVAT on hold AccountCAPE   Debit RG 23 AED AccountCAPE   Debit RG 23 BED Account

Page 18 of 254

Page 19: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)CAPE   Debit RG 23 SED AccountCEIV   Credit CENVAT Suspense AccountCEIV   Debit PLA AED AccountCEIV   Debit PLA BED AccountCEIV   Debit PLA SED AccountCEIV   Debit RG 23 AED AccountCEIV   Debit RG 23 BED AccountCEIV   Debit RG 23 SED AccountDIEX   Credit CENVAT Clearing accountDIEX   Debit RG 23 AED AccountDIEX   Debit RG 23 BED AccountDIEX   Debit RG 23 SED AccountDLFC   Credit PLA AED AccountDLFC   Credit PLA BED AccountDLFC   Credit PLA Cess AccountDLFC   Credit PLA SED AccountDLFC   Credit RG 23 AED AccountDLFC   Credit RG 23 BED AccountDLFC   Credit RG 23 SED AccountDLFC   Debit CENVAT Suspense AccountEWPO   Credit CENVAT Clearing accountEWPO   Debit RG 23 AED AccountEWPO   Debit RG 23 BED AccountEWPO   Debit RG 23 SED AccountGRPO   Credit CENVAT Clearing accountGRPO   Debit CENVAT on hold AccountGRPO   Debit RG 23 AED AccountGRPO   Debit RG 23 BED AccountGRPO   Debit RG 23 SED AccountMRDY   Credit PLA AED AccountMRDY   Credit PLA BED AccountMRDY   Credit PLA Cess AccountMRDY   Credit PLA SED AccountMRDY   Credit RG 23 AED AccountMRDY   Credit RG 23 BED AccountMRDY   Credit RG 23 SED AccountMRDY   Debit CENVAT Clearing accountMRRD   Credit PLA AED AccountMRRD   Credit PLA BED AccountMRRD   Credit PLA Cess AccountMRRD   Credit PLA SED AccountMRRD   Credit RG 23 AED AccountMRRD   Credit RG 23 BED AccountMRRD   Credit RG 23 SED AccountMRRD   Debit CENVAT Clearing accountMRWO   Credit PLA AED AccountMRWO   Credit PLA BED AccountMRWO   Credit PLA Cess AccountMRWO   Credit PLA SED AccountMRWO   Credit RG 23 AED Account

Page 19 of 254

Page 20: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)MRWO   Credit RG 23 BED AccountMRWO   Credit RG 23 SED AccountMRWO   Debit CENVAT Clearing accountOTHR   Credit PLA AED AccountOTHR   Credit PLA BED AccountOTHR   Credit PLA Cess AccountOTHR   Credit PLA SED AccountOTHR   Credit RG 23 AED AccountOTHR   Credit RG 23 BED AccountOTHR   Credit RG 23 SED AccountOTHR   Debit CENVAT Suspense AccountTR6C   Credit PLA on hold AccountTR6C   Debit PLA AED AccountTR6C   Debit PLA BED AccountTR6C   Debit PLA Cess AccountTR6C   Debit PLA SED AccountUTLZ   Credit PLA AED AccountUTLZ   Credit PLA BED AccountUTLZ   Credit PLA Cess AccountUTLZ   Credit PLA SED AccountUTLZ   Credit RG 23 AED AccountUTLZ   Credit RG 23 BED AccountUTLZ   Credit RG 23 SED AccountUTLZ   Debit CENVAT Clearing account

4. Press enter complete the entries

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or press Control + S.

ResultData was saved.

3.2.3 Assigning G/L Accounts to Excise Transaction Types

UseIn this IMG activity, you assign the excise and CENVAT accounts to G/L accounts to Excise Transaction Types.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Account Determination Specify G/L Accounts per Excise Transaction

Page 20 of 254

Page 21: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)2. On the Excise Account Assignment Table: screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries.

Sheet 1

Excise Gp

ETT CoCd Sub TrnTyp ChAc RG23A BED

RG23A AED

RG23A SED

Excise Group

Excise Transaction Type

Company Code

Sub Transaction Type

Chart of Accounts

RG23A BED

RG23A AED

RG23A SED

20 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 57FC BP01 01 CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 57NR BP01 01 CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 ARE1 BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 ARE3 BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 CAPE BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 CEIV BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 DIEX BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 DLFC BP01   CAIN 13113910 13113910 1311391010 EWPO BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 MRDY BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 MRRD BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 MRWO BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 OTHR BP01   CAIN 40011000 40011000 4001100010 TR6C BP01   CAIN 24820000 24840000 2484000010 UTLZ BP01   CAIN 40011000 40011000 40011000

Sheet 2

Excise Gp

ETT CoCd Sub TrnTyp ChAc RG23C BED

RG23C AED

RG23C SED

Excise Group

Excise Transaction Type

Company Code

Sub Transaction Type

Chart of Accounts

RG23C BED

RG23C AED

RG23C SED

20 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 57FC BP01 01 CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 57NR BP01 01 CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 ARE1 BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 ARE3 BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 CAPE BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 CEIV BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 DIEX BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 DLFC BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 EWPO BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 MRDY BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 MRRD BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 MRWO BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 OTHR BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 2487000010 TR6C BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 24870000

Page 21 of 254

Page 22: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)10 UTLZ BP01   CAIN 24850000 24860000 24870000

Sheet 3

Excise Gp

ETT CoCd Sub TrnTyp ChAc Offset Mod.Clear PLA BED

Excise Group

Excise Transaction Type

Company Code

Sub Transaction Type

Chart of Accounts

Offset Modavat Clearing Acount

PLA BED

20 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 57FC BP01 01 CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 57NR BP01 01 CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 ARE1 BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 ARE3 BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 CAPE BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 CEIV BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 DIEX BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 DLFC BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 EWPO BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 MRDY BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 MRRD BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 MRWO BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 OTHR BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 TR6C BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 2488000010 UTLZ BP01   CAIN 24920000 13113920 24880000

Sheet 4

Excise Gp ETT CoCd Sub TrnTyp ChAc PLA AED PLA SED PLA CESSExcise Group

Excise Transaction Type

Company Code

Sub Transaction Type

Chart of Accounts

PLA AED PLA SED PLA CESS

20 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 57FC BP01 01 CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 57NR BP01 01 CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 ARE1 BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 ARE3 BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 CAPE BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 CEIV BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 DIEX BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 DLFC BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 EWPO BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 MRDY BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 MRRD BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 MRWO BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 OTHR BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 TR6C BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 2491000010 UTLZ BP01   CAIN 24890000 24900000 24910000

Page 22 of 254

Page 23: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Sheet 5

Excise Gp

ETT CoCd Sub TrnTyp

ChAc CENVAT OH

CENVAT sse

PLA On Hld

Reversal

Excise Group

Excise Transaction Type

Company Code

Sub Transaction Type

Chart of Accounts

CENVAT on hold

CENVAT suspense

PLA On Hold

Reversal

20 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 57FC BP01 01 CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 57NR BP01 01 CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 ARE1 BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 ARE3 BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 CAPE BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 CEIV BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 DIEX BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 DLFC BP01   CAIN 24930000 54000000 24920000 1311393010 EWPO BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 GRPO BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 MRDY BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 MRRD BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 MRWO BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 OTHR BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 TR6C BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 1311393010 UTLZ BP01   CAIN 24930000 13113910 24920000 13113930

4. Press enter complete the entries

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or press Control + S.

ResultData was saved.

3.3 Transactions: Incoming Excise Invoices

3.3.1 Selecting Fields

UseIn this IMG activity, you specify which fields you want in the Incoming Excise Invoices transaction. This setting comes as a default in Standard SAP.

Procedure

Page 23 of 254

Page 24: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Incoming Excise invoice Select Fields

2. The following entries comes as part of Standard SAP system:

Modifiable field Field Name Input Req.Disp Hide HiLi

Delete OK_NOT_OK X        Additional data J_1IEXITEM-ADDLDATA4 X        Additional data J_1IEXITEM-ADDLDATA3 X        Additional data J_1IEXITEM-ADDLDATA2 X        Additional data J_1IEXITEM-ADDLDATA1 X        Additional data J_1IEXHEAD-ADDLDATA4 X        Additional data J_1IEXHEAD-ADDLDATA3 X        Additional data J_1IEXHEAD-ADDLDATA2 X        Additional data J_1IEXHEAD-ADDLDATA1 X        Additional value J_1IEXITEM-ADDLVAL2 X        Additional value J_1IEXITEM-ADDLVAL1 X        Additional value J_1IEXHEAD-ADDLVAL X        Business Area J_1IEXHEAD-GSBER X        ECC No. J_1IEXHEAD-EXCCD X        Excise Division J_1IEXHEAD-EXCDI X        Excise Range J_1IEXHEAD-EXCRG X        Material Description J_1IEXITEM-MAKTX X        Material Type J_1IEXITEM-CAPIND X        Preprinted serial no. J_1IEXHEAD-PREPRN X        Rejection code J_1IEXHEAD-REJ_CODE X        Ship-from vendor J_1IEXHEAD-SHIPFROM X        

3.3.2 Defining Processing Modes per Transaction

UseIn this IMG activity, you specify which processing modes are used in the various Incoming Excise Invoice transactions. This setting comes as a default in Standard SAP.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Incoming Excise invoice Define processing modes per Transaction

Page 24 of 254

Page 25: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

2. The following entries comes as part of Standard SAP system:

Transaction Code Processing Mode ActiveJ1IA101 Capture Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Change XJ1IA101 Display XJ1IA101 Post  J1IA101 Cancel XJ1IA101 Update XJ1IA101 Reverse XJ1IA101 Create ARE-1 XJ1IA101 Create ARE-3  J1IA102 Capture Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Change XJ1IA102 Display XJ1IA102 Post  J1IA102 Cancel XJ1IA102 Update  J1IA102 Reverse  J1IA102 Create ARE-1 XJ1IA102 Create ARE-3  J1IA103 Capture Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Change  J1IA103 Display XJ1IA103 Post  J1IA103 Cancel  J1IA103 Update XJ1IA103 Reverse  J1IA103 Create ARE-1  J1IA103 Create ARE-3  J1IA104 Capture Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Change  J1IA104 Display XJ1IA104 Post  J1IA104 Cancel  J1IA104 Update  J1IA104 Reverse XJ1IA104 Create ARE-1  J1IA104 Create ARE-3  J1IA301 Capture Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Change XJ1IA301 Display XJ1IA301 Post  J1IA301 Cancel XJ1IA301 Update XJ1IA301 Reverse XJ1IA301 Create ARE-1  J1IA301 Create ARE-3 X

Page 25 of 254

Page 26: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)J1IA302 Capture Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Change XJ1IA302 Display XJ1IA302 Post  J1IA302 Cancel XJ1IA302 Update  J1IA302 Reverse  J1IA302 Create ARE-1  J1IA302 Create ARE-3 XJ1IA303 Capture Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Change  J1IA303 Display XJ1IA303 Post  J1IA303 Cancel  J1IA303 Update XJ1IA303 Reverse  J1IA303 Create ARE-1  J1IA303 Create ARE-3  J1IA304 Capture Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Change  J1IA304 Display XJ1IA304 Post  J1IA304 Cancel  J1IA304 Update  J1IA304 Reverse XJ1IA304 Create ARE-1  J1IA304 Create ARE-3  J1IEX Capture Excise Invoice XJ1IEX Change XJ1IEX Display XJ1IEX Post XJ1IEX Cancel XJ1IEX Update  J1IEX Reverse  J1IEX Create ARE-1  J1IEX Create ARE-3  J1IEX_C Capture Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_C Change  J1IEX_C Display XJ1IEX_C Post  J1IEX_C Cancel  J1IEX_C Update  J1IEX_C Reverse  J1IEX_C Create ARE-1  J1IEX_C Create ARE-3  J1IEX_P Capture Excise Invoice  J1IEX_P Change XJ1IEX_P Display XJ1IEX_P Post XJ1IEX_P Cancel X

Page 26 of 254

Page 27: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)J1IEX_P Update  J1IEX_P Reverse  J1IEX_P Create ARE-1  J1IEX_P Create ARE-3  

3.3.3 Defining Reference Documents per Transaction

UseIn this IMG activity, you specify for each combination of transaction and processing mode which reference documents you want the users to be able to use.

This setting comes as a default in Standard SAP.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Incoming Excise invoice Define Reference Documents per Transaction

2. The following entries comes as part of Standard SAP system:

Transaction Code Processing Mode Reference Document ActiveJ1IA101 Change Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Change Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Change Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Change ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA101 Change ARE1 Form XJ1IA101 Change ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA101 Change ARE3 Form  J1IA101 Display Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Display Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Display Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Display ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA101 Display ARE1 Form XJ1IA101 Display ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA101 Display ARE3 Form  J1IA101 Post Purchase Order  J1IA101 Post Stock Transport Order  J1IA101 Post Scheduling Agreement  J1IA101 Post Contract  J1IA101 Post Goods Receipt  J1IA101 Post Without Purchase Order  J1IA101 Post Internal Excise Invoice  

Page 27 of 254

Page 28: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)J1IA101 Post Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Post Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA101 Post ARE1 Form  J1IA101 Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA101 Post ARE3 Form  J1IA101 Cancel Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Cancel Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA101 Cancel ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA101 Cancel ARE1 Form  J1IA101 Cancel ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA101 Cancel ARE3 Form  J1IA101 Update ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA101 Update ARE1 Form XJ1IA101 Update ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA101 Update ARE3 Form  J1IA101 Reverse ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA101 Reverse ARE1 Form XJ1IA101 Reverse ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA101 Reverse ARE3 Form  J1IA101 Create ARE-1 Outgoing Excise Invoice XJ1IA101 Create ARE-3 Purchase Order  J1IA101 Create ARE-3 Stock Transport Order  J1IA101 Create ARE-3 Scheduling Agreement  J1IA101 Create ARE-3 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Change Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Change Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Change ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA102 Change ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA102 Display Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Display Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Display Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Display ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA102 Display ARE1 Form XJ1IA102 Display ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA102 Display ARE3 Form  J1IA102 Post Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Post Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA102 Post ARE1 Form  J1IA102 Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA102 Post ARE3 Form  J1IA102 Cancel Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA102 Cancel ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA102 Cancel ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA102 Update ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA102 Update ARE1 Form  J1IA102 Update ARE3 Internal Document  

Page 28 of 254

Page 29: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)J1IA102 Update ARE3 Form  J1IA102 Reverse ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA102 Reverse ARE1 Form  J1IA102 Reverse ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA102 Reverse ARE3 Form  J1IA102 Create ARE-1 Outgoing Excise Invoice XJ1IA102 Create ARE-3 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Change Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Change Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Change ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA103 Change ARE1 Form  J1IA103 Change ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA103 Change ARE3 Form  J1IA103 Display Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Display Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Display ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA103 Display ARE1 Form XJ1IA103 Display ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA103 Display ARE3 Form  J1IA103 Post Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Post Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA103 Post ARE1 Form  J1IA103 Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA103 Post ARE3 Form  J1IA103 Cancel Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Cancel ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA103 Cancel ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA103 Update ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA103 Update ARE1 Form XJ1IA103 Update ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA103 Update ARE3 Form  J1IA103 Reverse ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA103 Reverse ARE1 Form  J1IA103 Reverse ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA103 Reverse ARE3 Form  J1IA103 Create ARE-1 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA103 Create ARE-3 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Change Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Change Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Change ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA104 Change ARE1 Form  J1IA104 Change ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA104 Change ARE3 Form  J1IA104 Display Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Display Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Display ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA104 Display ARE1 Form XJ1IA104 Display ARE3 Internal Document  

Page 29 of 254

Page 30: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)J1IA104 Display ARE3 Form  J1IA104 Post Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Post Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA104 Post ARE1 Form  J1IA104 Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA104 Post ARE3 Form  J1IA104 Cancel Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Cancel ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA104 Cancel ARE1 Form  J1IA104 Cancel ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA104 Cancel ARE3 Form  J1IA104 Update ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA104 Update ARE1 Form  J1IA104 Update ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA104 Update ARE3 Form  J1IA104 Reverse ARE1 Internal Document XJ1IA104 Reverse ARE1 Form XJ1IA104 Reverse ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA104 Reverse ARE3 Form  J1IA104 Create ARE-1 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA104 Create ARE-3 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Change Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Change Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Change ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA301 Change ARE1 Form  J1IA301 Change ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA301 Change ARE3 Form XJ1IA301 Display Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Display Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Display ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA301 Display ARE1 Form  J1IA301 Display ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA301 Display ARE3 Form XJ1IA301 Post Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Post Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA301 Post ARE1 Form  J1IA301 Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA301 Post ARE3 Form  J1IA301 Cancel Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Cancel ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA301 Cancel ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA301 Update ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA301 Update ARE1 Form  J1IA301 Update ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA301 Update ARE3 Form XJ1IA301 Reverse ARE1 Internal Document  

Page 30 of 254

Page 31: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)J1IA301 Reverse ARE1 Form  J1IA301 Reverse ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA301 Reverse ARE3 Form XJ1IA301 Create ARE-1 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA301 Create ARE-3 Outgoing Excise Invoice XJ1IA302 Change Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Change Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Change ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA302 Change ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA302 Display Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Display Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Display ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA302 Display ARE1 Form  J1IA302 Display ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA302 Display ARE3 Form XJ1IA302 Post Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Post Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA302 Post ARE1 Form  J1IA302 Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA302 Post ARE3 Form  J1IA302 Cancel Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Cancel ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA302 Cancel ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA302 Update ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA302 Update ARE1 Form  J1IA302 Update ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA302 Update ARE3 Form  J1IA302 Reverse ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA302 Reverse ARE1 Form  J1IA302 Reverse ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA302 Reverse ARE3 Form  J1IA302 Create ARE-1 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA302 Create ARE-3 Outgoing Excise Invoice XJ1IA303 Change Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Change Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Change ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA303 Change ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA303 Display Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Display Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Display ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA303 Display ARE1 Form  J1IA303 Display ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA303 Display ARE3 Form XJ1IA303 Post Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Post Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA303 Post ARE1 Form  J1IA303 Post ARE3 Internal Document  

Page 31 of 254

Page 32: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)J1IA303 Post ARE3 Form  J1IA303 Cancel Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Cancel ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA303 Cancel ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA303 Update ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA303 Update ARE1 Form  J1IA303 Update ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA303 Update ARE3 Form XJ1IA303 Reverse ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA303 Reverse ARE1 Form  J1IA303 Reverse ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA303 Reverse ARE3 Form  J1IA303 Create ARE-1 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA303 Create ARE-3 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Change Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Change Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Change ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA304 Change ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA304 Display Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Display Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Display ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA304 Display ARE1 Form  J1IA304 Display ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA304 Display ARE3 Form XJ1IA304 Post Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Post Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA304 Post ARE1 Form  J1IA304 Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA304 Post ARE3 Form  J1IA304 Cancel Internal Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Cancel ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA304 Cancel ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA304 Update ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA304 Update ARE1 Form  J1IA304 Update ARE3 Internal Document  J1IA304 Update ARE3 Form XJ1IA304 Reverse ARE1 Internal Document  J1IA304 Reverse ARE1 Form  J1IA304 Reverse ARE3 Internal Document XJ1IA304 Reverse ARE3 Form XJ1IA304 Create ARE-1 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IA304 Create ARE-3 Outgoing Excise Invoice  J1IEX Capture Excise Invoice Purchase Order XJ1IEX Capture Excise Invoice Stock Transport Order XJ1IEX Capture Excise Invoice Scheduling Agreement XJ1IEX Capture Excise Invoice Goods Receipt XJ1IEX Capture Excise Invoice Without Purchase Order X

Page 32 of 254

Page 33: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)J1IEX Change Internal Excise Invoice XJ1IEX Change Vendor Excise Invoice XJ1IEX Change ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX Change ARE1 Form  J1IEX Change ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX Change ARE3 Form  J1IEX Display Internal Excise Invoice XJ1IEX Display Vendor Excise Invoice XJ1IEX Display ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX Display ARE1 Form  J1IEX Display ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX Display ARE3 Form  J1IEX Post Internal Excise Invoice XJ1IEX Post Vendor Excise Invoice XJ1IEX Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX Post ARE1 Form  J1IEX Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX Post ARE3 Form  J1IEX Cancel Internal Excise Invoice XJ1IEX Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice XJ1IEX Cancel ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX Cancel ARE1 Form  J1IEX Cancel ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX Cancel ARE3 Form  J1IEX_C Capture Excise Invoice Purchase Order XJ1IEX_C Capture Excise Invoice Stock Transport Order XJ1IEX_C Capture Excise Invoice Scheduling Agreement XJ1IEX_C Capture Excise Invoice Goods Receipt XJ1IEX_C Capture Excise Invoice Without Purchase Order XJ1IEX_C Change Internal Excise Invoice  J1IEX_C Change Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IEX_C Change ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX_C Change ARE1 Form  J1IEX_C Change ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX_C Change ARE3 Form  J1IEX_C Display Internal Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_C Display Vendor Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_C Display ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX_C Display ARE1 Form  J1IEX_C Display ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX_C Display ARE3 Form  J1IEX_C Post Internal Excise Invoice  J1IEX_C Post Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IEX_C Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX_C Post ARE1 Form  J1IEX_C Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX_C Post ARE3 Form  J1IEX_C Cancel Internal Excise Invoice  J1IEX_C Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice  J1IEX_C Cancel ARE1 Internal Document  

Page 33 of 254

Page 34: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)J1IEX_C Cancel ARE1 Form  J1IEX_C Cancel ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX_C Cancel ARE3 Form  J1IEX_P Capture Excise Invoice Purchase Order  J1IEX_P Capture Excise Invoice Stock Transport Order  J1IEX_P Capture Excise Invoice Scheduling Agreement  J1IEX_P Capture Excise Invoice Goods Receipt  J1IEX_P Capture Excise Invoice Without Purchase Order  J1IEX_P Change Internal Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_P Change Vendor Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_P Change ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX_P Change ARE1 Form  J1IEX_P Change ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX_P Change ARE3 Form  J1IEX_P Display Internal Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_P Display Vendor Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_P Display ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX_P Display ARE1 Form  J1IEX_P Display ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX_P Display ARE3 Form  J1IEX_P Post Internal Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_P Post Vendor Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_P Post ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX_P Post ARE1 Form  J1IEX_P Post ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX_P Post ARE3 Form  J1IEX_P Cancel Internal Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_P Cancel Vendor Excise Invoice XJ1IEX_P Cancel ARE1 Internal Document  J1IEX_P Cancel ARE1 Form  J1IEX_P Cancel ARE3 Internal Document  J1IEX_P Cancel ARE3 Form  

3.3.4 Maintaining Rejection Codes

UseIn this IMG activity, you define the rejection codes that are used in the Incoming Excise Invoices transaction.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Incoming Excise invoice Maintain Rejection Codes

Page 34 of 254

Page 35: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)2. On the Change View: “Rejection Codes”: Over view screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Rejection Code Rejection Code O 10 Input value

Description Description of rejection code

O Discrepancy in Excise Invoice

Input value

Post Ind Posting indicator O Leave it blank

4. Press enter complete the entries

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or press Control + S.

ResultData was saved.

3.3.5 Maintaining Movement Types Involve Excise Invoice

UseIn this IMG activity, you specify which movement types relating to goods receipts involve excise invoices. The system uses this information during the goods receipt procedure. When you post a goods receipt using one of the movement types that you have specified here, the system prompts you to enter the excise invoice.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Incoming Excise invoice Specify which Movement Types Involve Excise Invoice.

Page 35 of 254

Page 36: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)2. On the Movement Type versus Register Relevance: screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries.

Movmt Type Register Note

Movement Type Register

101

101

101

102

102

102

103

103

104

104

122

122

124

124

131

132

261

261

262

262

561

601

641

561

561

602

642

Register RG1

Register RG23A

Register RG23C

Register RG1

Register RG23A

Register RG23C

Register RG23A

Register RG23C

Register RG23A

Register RG23C

Register RG23A

Register RG23C

Register RG23A

Register RG23C

Register RG1

Register RG1

Register RG23A

Register RG23C

Register RG23A

Register RG23C

Register RG1

Register RG1

Register RG1

Register RG23A

Register RG23C

Register RG1

Register RG1

4. Press enter complete the entries

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or press Control + S.

ResultData was saved.

Page 36 of 254

Page 37: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

3.3.6 Utilization Determination

UseIn this IMG activity, you specify which CENVAT accounts are to be debited by the Fortnight Utilization of CENVAT report: When the report calculates how much excise duty you must remit, it automatically proposes which CENVAT accounts the duty should be debited to. Here, you specify those defaults.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Utilization Utilization Determination

2. On the Movement Type versus Register Relevance: screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon for maintaining the new entries.

Excise gp ACC Name Note

Excise Group Account Name

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

PLA AED account

PLA BED account

PLA SED account

RG 23A AED account

RG 23A BED account

RG 23A SED account

RG 23C AED account

RG 23C BED account

RG 23C SED account

4. Press enter complete the entries

5. Save the entries by clicking Save icon or press Control + S.

Result

Page 37 of 254

Page 38: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)Data was saved.

3.3.7 Excise Registers

UseIn this IMG activity, for each of your company codes, you specify which SAP script forms the system prints the excise registers with.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Excise Registers Specify SAP Script Forms

2. On the Table for all the layouts of excise reporting: screen, maintain the following entries. SAP as a standard will come with some ready made forms; the same are being used here.

CoCd Reg. name Lay. num

Form Layout description Tcode/prog No. copies

Company Code

Register Name Layout number

Form Layout description Tcode/prog  

BP01 PLA Register 001 J_2I_PLA PERSONAL LEDGER ACCOUNT J_2IPLA 001

BP01 PLACONS Register 001 J_2I_PLA PERSONAL LEDGER ACCOUNT J_2IPLA 001

BP01 RG1 Register 001 J_2I_RG1 RG1 REGISTER J_2IRRG1 001

BP01 RG1RI Register 001 J_2I_RG1 RG1 DAILY STOCK REPORT J_2IRCG1 001

BP01 RG23A1 Register 001 J_2IRG23A_PART1 RG23A PART1 J_2IRAP1 001

BP01 RG23A2 Register 001 J_2IRG23A_PART2 RG23A PART2 J_2IRAP2 001

BP01 RG23C1 Register 001 J_2IRG23C_PART1 RG23A PART1 J_2IRCP1 001

BP01 RG23C2 Register 001 J_2IRG23C_PART2 RG23A PART2 J_2IRCP2 001

BP01 RG23D Register 001 J_2I_RG23D RG23D REGISTER J_2IRG23 001

BP01 RT12 Register 001 J_2I_RT12_ABSTRA RT12 - MONTHLY ABSTRACT J_2IRT12 001

BP01 RT12 Register 002 J_2I_RT12_DETLS RT12 - DETAILS J_2IRT12 001

BP01 RT12 Register 003 J_2I_RT12_3 RT12 - FORM 3 J_2IRT12 001

3. Press enter to complete the entries.

4. To save the entries click on Save icon or press Control + S.

Result

Page 38 of 254

Page 39: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)Data was saved.

3.4 Business Transactions: Tools

3.4.1 Number Ranges

UseAs a proof of performing transactions SAP will give document number. You can maintain the number ranges for all CIN Number range objects using this transaction.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code J1I9 or SNRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Tools Number Ranges

Page 39 of 254

Page 40: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)2. On the Number Rage Object Maintenance: screen, give the Object name and click on

Number Range icon, then system will prompt for new screen.

As per the table indicated for each and every Object you need to maintain the number ranges. Here in this table Year, From number and To number are give for example only. As per the requirement you can incorporate the current year and from and to number ranges.

These number ranges to be given for all Objects and all Excise groups separately.

3. On this new screen give the Excise Group or Excise Series depending on object and maintain the number ranges.

4. Click on Interval icon, then system will give new screen with name Maintain Number Range Interval.

5. On this screen click on Interval icon or press Shift+F1, then maintain No, Year, From number and To numbers as per the table mentioned below:

6. After giving the number ranges for each and every object press Save icon or press Control + S to save the number ranges.

Object Excise Group No Year From number To number

J_1IINTNUM 01 9999 0000000001 0000099999

J_1IRG23A1 10 01 2003 0000000001 0000099999

J_1IRG23A2 10 01 2003 0000000001 0000099999

J_1IRG23C1 10 01 2003 0000000001 0000099999

J_1IRG23C2 10 01 2003 0000000001 0000099999

J_1IRG23D 20 01 2003 0000000001 0000099999

J_1IINTPR2 10 01 2003 0000000001 0000099999

J_1IPLA2 10 01 2003 0000000001 0000099999

J_1IRG1 10 01 2003 0000001000 0000099999

Object Series Group No Year From number To number

J_1IEXCLOC 11 01 2003 1100000001 1100099999

J_1IEXCLOC 12 01 2003 1200000001 1200099999

J_1IEXCLOC 21 01 2003 2100000001 2100099999

J_1I57FC 11 01 2003 0000000001 0000099999

J_1IEXCEXP 12 01 2003 0000005000 0000009000

J_1IDEPINV 21 01 2003 0000000001 0000099999

ResultThe changes were saved.

Page 40 of 254

Page 41: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

3.4.2 Long Texts

UseIn this IMG activity, you define the different types of long texts that you want to be able to maintain in the various excise transactions

This setting comes as a default in Standard SAP.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Tools Long Texts

2. The following entries comes as part of Standard SAP system:

Object ID Description INCL.ID NAJ1IA 0001 Excise invoice text   XJ1IA 0002 Bill of lading text   XJ1IA 0003 Shipment details text   XJ1IA DNLD Download   XJ1IARE1 0001 Mode of transport   XJ1IARE1 0002 Export obligation   XJ1IARE1 0003 Excise Seal Number   XJ1IARE1 0004 Container number   XJ1IEX 0001 Excise invoice text   XJ1IEX 0002 Bill of lading text   XJ1IEX 0003 Shipment details text   XJ1IEX DNLD Download text   XJ1IF 0001 Sub contracting challan   XJ1IF 0002 Sub contractors norms   XJ1IF 0003 Shipping instructions   XJ1IF DNLD Download   XJ1IF IDEN Identification marks   XJ1IF PROC Nature of processing   XJ1IG 0001 Invoice   XJ1IH 0001 JV text   XJ1IH DNLD Download   XJ1II 0001 Excise invoice   XJ1II DNLD Download   XJ1IJ 0001 Excise depot details   XJ1IM 0001 Depot excise invoice item   XJ1IS 0001 Excise other movements -header   XJ1IS DNLD Download text   XJ1IU DNLD     XJ1IW 0001 Header   XJ1IW DNLD Download   X

Page 41 of 254

Page 42: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

3.4.3 Message Control

Use

In this activity, you can specify whether a given message should appear as a warning message or an error message.

This setting comes as a default in Standard SAP.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movements India Tools Message Control

2. The following entries comes as part of Standard SAP system:

Application Area

Message No.

Transaction Code User

Message Type

4F 122     Warning4F 153     Error4F 167     Error4F 168     Warning4F 176     Error4F 180     Warning4F 181     Warning4F 194     Warning8I 103     Warning8I 184     Warning8I 312     Warning8I 339     Warning8I 478     Warning8I 542     Error8I 575     Warning8I 576     Warning8I 577     Warning8I 634     Warning

4 Master Data Creation

Page 42 of 254

Page 43: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

4.1 Materials Master – Raw Materials creation

UseIn this activity you are going to create raw materials.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu Logistics Materials Management Materials Master Material Create (General) Immediately

Transaction Code MM01

2. Create material manually with reference to variant file SMB14_MM01_C110_J81_01.TXT

4.2 Materials Master – Packing Materials creation

UseIn this activity you are going to create packing material.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu Logistics Materials Management Materials Master Material Create (General) Immediately

Transaction Code MM01

2. Create material manually with reference to variant file SMB14_MM01_C120_J81_01.TXT

4.3 Materials Master – Trading Materials creation

UseIn this activity you are going to create trading material.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu Logistics Materials Management Materials Master Material Create (General) Immediately

Transaction Code MM01

2. Create material manually with reference to variant file SMB14_MM01_C130_J81_01.TXT

Page 43 of 254

Page 44: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

4.4 Materials Master – Finished Materials creation

UseIn this activity you are going to create finished material.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu Logistics Materials Management Materials Master Material Create (General) Immediately

Transaction Code MM01

2. Create material manually with reference to variant file SMB14_MM01_C140_J81_01.TXT

4.5 Vendor Master Creation

UseIn this activity you are going to create vendor master records.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

Transaction Code XK01

2. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_MM01_C210_J81_01.TXT

4.6 CIN Master Data – Chapter ID

UseIn this activity you are going to create trading material.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

Page 44 of 254

Page 45: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)SAP Easy Access menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Choose radio button Chapter-Id and click Maintain (F5).

3. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C310_J81_01.TXT.

4.7 CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination

UseIn this activity you are going to create material and chapter ids combination.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Choose radio button Material and Chapter-Id Combination and click Maintain (F5).

3. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C320_J81_01.TXT.

4.8 CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination

UseIn this activity you are going to create master data relating to CENVAT determination.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Choose radio button CENVAT Determination and click Maintain (F5).

3. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C330_J81_01.TXT.

Page 45 of 254

Page 46: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

4.9 CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details

UseIn this activity you are going to create master data relating to vendor excise details.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Choose radio button Vendor Excise Details and click Maintain (F5).

3. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C340_J81_01.TXT.

4.10 CIN Master Data – SSI Rates

UseIn this activity you are going to create master data relating to SSI rates.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Choose radio button SSI Rates and click Maintain (F5).

3. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C350_J81_01.TXT.

4.11 CIN Master Data – Excise Indicator for Plant

UseIn this activity you are going to create master data relating to Excise Indicator for Plant.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

Page 46 of 254

Page 47: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)SAP Easy Access menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Choose radio button Excise Indicator for Plant and click Maintain (F5).

3. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C360_J81_01.TXT.

4.12 CIN Master Data – Excise Indicator for Plant and Vendor

UseIn this activity you are going to create master data relating to Excise Indicator for Plant and Vendors.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Choose radio button Excise Indicator for Plant and Vendor and click Maintain (F5).

3. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C370_J81_01.TXT.

4.13 CIN Master Data – Excise Tax Rate

UseIn this activity you are going to create master data relating to Excise Tax Rates.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Choose radio button Excise Tax Rate and click Maintain (F5).

3. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C380_J81_01.TXT.

Page 47 of 254

Page 48: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

4.14 Creating Batch Search Strategy SD

UseIn this activity you are going to create batch search strategy for finished material.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu Logistics Central Functions Batch Management Batch Determination Batch Search Strategy For Sales and Distribution

Transaction Code VCH1

2. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_VCH1_C410_J81_01.TXT.

4.15 Quality Inspection Plan Maintaining

UseIn this activity you are going to create inspection plan.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu Logistics Quality Management Quality Planning Inspection Planning Inspection Plan Create

Transaction Code QP01

2. Create manually with reference to variant file SMB14_QP01_C088_J81_01.txt.

Page 48 of 254

Page 49: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

ContentsJ82 – Procurement of External Services: Configuration Guide.....................................................51

1 Purpose................................................................................................................................. 51

2 Preparation............................................................................................................................ 51

2.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................51

3 Procurement of External Services.........................................................................................51

3.1 Procurement of External Services – Basic Settings.....................................................51

3.1.1 Tax Code Creation for Service Tax.........................................................................51

3.2 Output Condition Record for Purchase Order..............................................................52

3.3 Output Condition Record for Service Entry Sheet.......................................................53

3.4 Extended Withholding Tax – Basic Settings................................................................54

3.4.1 Checking Withholding Tax Countries......................................................................54

3.4.2 Defining Official Withholding Tax Codes.................................................................55

3.4.3 Defining Reasons for Exemption.............................................................................55

3.5 Defining Business Place..............................................................................................56

3.6 Defining Section Code.................................................................................................57

3.7 Maintaining Factory Calendar to Section Code...........................................................58

3.8 Extended Withholding Tax - Calculation......................................................................59

3.8.1 Defining Withholding Tax Type for Invoice Posting.................................................59

3.8.2 Defining Withholding Tax Types for Payment Posting.............................................65

3.8.3 Defining Rounding Rule for Withholding Tax Types................................................67

3.8.4 Defining Withholding Tax Codes.............................................................................68

3.8.5 Checking Recipient Types.......................................................................................69

3.8.6 Maintaining Tax Due Dates.....................................................................................70

3.8.7 Maintaining Surcharge Rates..................................................................................71

3.8.8 Assigning Types of Companies to Withholding Tax Codes.....................................72

3.9 Extended Withholding Tax – Company Code Assignment..........................................73

3.9.1 Assigning Withholding Tax Type to Company Code...............................................73

3.9.2 Activating Extended Withholding Tax Code.............................................................74

3.9.3 Defining Accounts to post the Withholding Tax.......................................................75

3.10 Maintaining Number Group for Internal Challan Numbers...........................................76

3.11 Assignment of Number Ranges...................................................................................77

3.11.1 Assigning Number Ranges to Number Groups.......................................................77

3.11.2 Maintaining Number Ranges...................................................................................77

3.11.3 Maintaining Number Groups and SAP Script Forms...............................................78

Page 49 of 254

Page 50: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

3.11.4 Assigning Number Ranges to Number Groups.......................................................79

3.11.5 Maintaining Number Ranges...................................................................................80

4 Configuration CATTs.............................................................................................................81

4.1 Maintaining Address for Business Place......................................................................81

4.2 Maintaining Address for Section Code........................................................................81

4.3 Import of Tax Codes objects list..................................................................................81

5 Master Data........................................................................................................................... 82

5.1 Creating Service Master..............................................................................................82

5.2 Creating Vendor Master...............................................................................................82

Page 50 of 254

Page 51: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

J82 – Procurement of External Services: Configuration Guide

5 PurposeThe purpose of this document is to describe the general configuration steps required to manually set up the configuration within the system landscape.

The Configuration Guide describes how to set up the configuration of a Building Block manually, without the support of automated configuration tools. If you want to use BC Sets and CATT procedures for an automated installation process, refer to the Building Block Installation Guide of the Materials Management IN Building Block.

6 Preparation

6.1 PrerequisitesJ02 – Organizational Elements

J03 – Financial Accounting

J08 – Standard Cost and Profit Center Accounting

J05 – Materials Management

7 Procurement of External Services

7.1 Procurement of External Services – Basic Settings

7.1.1 Tax Code Creation for Service Tax

UseIn this IMG setting you are going to create Service Tax Code for purchasing of services activity.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code FTXP

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Tax on Sales/Purchase Calculation Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchase

Page 51 of 254

Page 52: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

2. System will popup new screen with Country filed, please input IN on this filed.

3. On the screen Maintain Tax Code: Initial Screen maintain the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values

Note

Country key Country code R Already given IN Grayed out

Tax code Tax code to be created

R S2 Input

Jurisdiction Code Jurisdiction code R IN00 Input

Valid from Validity from date R Input the financial year starting date, for example April 1, 2003 as

01.04.2003

Input and press enter

System will give a popup screen, input the following values

Tax code Tax code S2 R Input Services 8% Inventorised

Input

Tax type Input Tax R V Input

You will get new screen Maintain Tax Code: Tax Rates, maintain the following entries:

IN:Serv.tax InputNVV IN:Serv.tax InputNVV

R 8 Input value

Save by clicking Save icon or press Control + S on your key board.

Extend this tax code V2 to IN02 Jurisdiction code of required.

4. By this activity you have crated a new tax code S2 (for example only) with 8% Service tax.

7.2 Output Condition Record for Purchase Order

UseIn this step you are going to create condition record for outputting the document.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code MN04

SAP Easy Access Menu Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Messages Purchase Order

Page 52 of 254

Page 53: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

2. On screen Create Output – Condition Records: Purchase Order you will get Output Type field, in put the value NEU in the field and pres Enter.

3. After selecting system will give a popup screen with three radio buttons; select Purchasing Output Determination: Document Type the third icon.

4. On the screen Create Condition Record (Purchase Order): Fast Entry, Make the following entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Doc.Type Document Type R FO Input value

PartF Partner R VN Input value

Medium Print medium R 1 Input value

Date/time Date and time R 3 Input value

Select this line item and

Click on Communication icon

Output Device Printer name R Give appropriate printer name

Input value

5. Press Enter key and save the entry by clicking on Save icon or press Control + S.

Result Condition records saved.

7.3 Output Condition Record for Service Entry Sheet

UseIn this IMG setting you are going to create output record for taking print of service entry sheet.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code MN13

SAP Easy Access Menu Logistics Materials Management Service Entry Sheet Environment Messages Create

Page 53 of 254

Page 54: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

2. On screen Create Output – Condition Records: Entry Sheet you will get Output Type field, in put the value NEU in the field and pres Enter.

3. After selecting system will give a popup screen with three radio buttons; select Purchasing Output Determination: Document Type the second icon.

4. On the screen Create Condition Records (Entry for Srvc Prfrmd): Fast Entry, Make the following entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Doc.Type Document Type R FO Input value

PartF Partner R VN Input value

Medium Print medium R 1 Input value

Date/time Date and time R 3 Input value

Select this line item and

Click on Communication icon

Output Device Printer name R Give appropriate printer name

Input value

5. Press Enter key and save the entry by clicking on Save icon or press Control + S.

7.4 Extended Withholding Tax – Basic Settings

7.4.1 Checking Withholding Tax Countries

UseThe withholding tax country is needed for printing the withholding tax form.

Activities

1. Check the country list delivered with the standard system.

2. Compare it with the official list from the tax authorities and make corrections where necessary.

Procedure 11. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings Check Withholding Tax Countries

Page 54 of 254

Page 55: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

12. On the Change View “Country Keys for Withholding Tax”: Overview screen, make the following entries

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Cty Country IN Country Key

Wcty Withholding Tax Country

IN As Country Key and With holding Tax country key is same for India

Description Description India Description of with holding tax Country

13. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.4.2 Defining Official Withholding Tax Codes

Use The withholding tax keys correspond to the Official Withholding Tax laws i.e. official income tax Section Code, according to which tax is withheld. The system can therefore assign the withholding tax items to the correct withholding tax return.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings Define Official Withholding Tax Codes

2. System will give a pop screen; make country IN entry in this field.

3. On the Change View “Official withholding tax key – Descriptions”: Overview screen, make the following entries for the Country IN

Official Key Name National Tax Code

194A Interest income other than securities

194C Payment to contractors

194D Insurance Commission

194I Rent

194J Prof/Technical services

195 Payment to foreign nationals

4. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

Page 55 of 254

Page 56: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

7.4.3 Defining Reasons for Exemption

Use In this activity reasons for exemption from withholding tax will be defined. You can enter this indicator in the vendor master record or in the company code withholding tax master record information.

Procedure1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings Define Reasons for Exemption

2. On the Change View “Withholding Tax type: Reasons for Exemption”: Overview screen, make the following new entries for the Country IN

Official Key Name

01 Exemption granted by AO

02 Exemption granted by ITO

03 Exemption granted by AC(IT)

04 Exemption granted by DC(IT)

3. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.5 Defining Business Place

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings India Define Business Place

2. System will give a popup screen, enter company code BP01 and press Enter.

3. On the Change View “Business Place”:Details screen, make the following entries for the Company Code BP01

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Business Place Business Place Key

BP01

Name 1 Name of Business Place

India Best Practices-Bus.Place

Page 56 of 254

Page 57: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

4. Press Enter or choose the Address icon to maintain the address details

5. Maintain the address details for the Business Place BP01 in the detail address screen:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Name 1 India Best Practices-B.Place

Name of the Tax office

Name 2

Name 3 &

Name 4

Enter required necessary details

Search Term1 BP

Search Term 2 BUSINESS PLACE ST2

Street/House number

MG Road Postal Address of Business Place

Postal Code 522000

City Bangalore

Country IN

Region 10

Time Zone India

Jurisdiction Code

IN00

Language EN

6. Press Enter to leave the Address details screen

7. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.6 Defining Section Code

Use Section Code is used for each tax deduction account number (TAN) and accordingly to which TDS Certificates and Annual returns will be filed with tax authorities.

Procedure

Page 57 of 254

Page 58: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings South Korea Define Section Code

2. System will give a pop screen, input company code BP01 in the filed and Enter to continue.

3. On the Change View “Section Codes”: Overview screen, make the following entries for the Company Code BP01:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Section Code Section Code Key BP01

Name 1 Name of Section code

India Best Practices Ltd

Business Place Business Place reference

Blank

4. Press Enter or choose the Address icon to maintain the address details

5. Maintain the address details for the Section Code BP01 in the detail address screen:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Name 1 India Best Practices Ltd.,

Name 2 Section Code Name 2 If any can be maintained

Search Term1 Maintain the TAN (Tax deduction Account Number)

Search Term 2

Street/House number

MG Road

Postal Code 522000

City Bangalore

Country IN

Region 10

Time Zone India

Jurisdiction Code

IN00

Language EN

6. Press Enter to leave the Address details screen

7. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

Page 58 of 254

Page 59: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

7.7 Maintaining Factory Calendar to Section Code

Use Which days the tax offices that you work with are open. The system uses this information when you post a vendor invoice, so that it can allow for public holidays when it determines the tax due date.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SM30

Menu System Services Table Maintenance Extended Table Maintenance

2. On the Maintain Table Views: Initial Screen, enter J_1IEWTCALID_N in filed Table/View, and click on Maintain icon to continue.

3. On the Change View “Calendar for Payment Due date – EWT India Section Code”: Overview screen, make the following New Entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Company Code Company Code Key

BP01

Section Code Section Code key BP01

Factory Calendar

Factory Calendar Key

IN

Rule Tax Rule Day Before

4. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.8 Extended Withholding Tax - Calculation

7.8.1 Defining Withholding Tax Type for Invoice Posting

Use This Withholding tax type is used for withholding and posting tax at the time of creating an invoice liability of the Vendor.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation Withholding Tax Type Define Withholding Tax Type for

Page 59 of 254

Page 60: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Invoice Posting

2. On the Change View “Define Withholding tax type: Posting at time of Invoice” screen, make the following New Entries for the Country IN

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Type

I1

Description Description of the Withholding Tax Type

INV-CONTRACTORS.-TDS SEC.194C

Calculation

Base Amount -Gross Amount

Base amount to calculate tax

Select the Gross Amount radio button

Rounding Rule

Round W/tax amnt. up

Rounding rule of W/holding Tax

Select the Round W/tax amount Up radio button

Post W/tax amount

Posting of With-holding tax

Activate the Post W/tax amount check box

Accumulation Type

No Accumulation

Accumulation of W/holding Tax

Select the No Accumulation Radio button

Control Data

W/tax Base Manual

Maintenance of with holding tax base as manual

Activate the W/tax Base Manual Check box

Manual W/tax amount

Maintenance of with holding tax as manual

Activate the W/tax amount Manual Check box

No Cert. Numbering

Generation of standard Certificate (not TDS certificates)

Activate the No. Certificate Numbering Check box

Base amount – W/Tax Code Level

Base amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Base amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

Withholding tax amount – W/tax Code level

Tax amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Withholding tax amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

3. To save the entries use the Save Icon.

4. To add some more tax types on the Change View “Define Withholding tax type: Posting at time of Invoice” screen, make the following New Entries:

Page 60 of 254

Page 61: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Type

I2

Description Description of the Withholding Tax Type

INV-ADVERT. CONTRACTS - TDS SEC.194C

Calculation

Base Amount -Gross Amount

Base amount to calculate tax

Select the Gross Amount radio button

Rounding Rule

Round W/tax amnt. up

Rounding rule of W/holding Tax

Select the Round W/tax amount Up radio button

Post W/tax amount

Posting of With-holding tax

Activate the Post W/tax amount check box

Accumulation Type

No Accumulation

Accumulation of W/holding Tax

Select the No Accumulation Radio button

Control Data

W/tax Base Manual

Maintenance of with holding tax base as manual

Activate the W/tax Base Manual Check box

Manual W/tax amount

Maintenance of with holding tax as manual

Activate the W/tax amount Manual Check box

No Cert. Numbering

Generation of standard Certificate (not TDS certificates)

Activate the No. Certificate Numbering Check box

Base amount – W/Tax Code Level

Base amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Base amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

Withholding tax amount – W/tax Code level

Tax amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Withholding tax amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

5. To save the entries use the Save Icon.

6. To add some more tax types on the Change View “Define Withholding tax type: Posting at time of Invoice” screen, make the following New Entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Type

I3

Page 61 of 254

Page 62: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Description Description of the Withholding Tax Type

INV-PROFESSIONAL FEES-TDS SEC.194J

Calculation

Base Amount -Gross Amount

Base amount to calculate tax

Select the Gross Amount radio button

Rounding Rule

Round W/tax amnt. up

Rounding rule of W/holding Tax

Select the Round W/tax amount Up radio button

Post W/tax amount

Posting of With-holding tax

Activate the Post W/tax amount check box

Accumulation Type

No Accumulation

Accumulation of W/holding Tax

Select the No Accumulation Radio button

Control Data

W/tax Base Manual

Maintenance of with holding tax base as manual

Activate the W/tax Base Manual Check box

Manual W/tax amount

Maintenance of with holding tax as manual

Activate the W/tax amount Manual Check box

No Cert. Numbering

Generation of standard Certificate (not TDS certificates)

Activate the No. Certificate Numbering Check box

Base amount – W/Tax Code Level

Base amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Base amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

Withholding tax amount – W/tax Code level

Tax amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Withholding tax amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

7. To save the entries use the Save Icon.

8. To add some more tax types on the Change View “Define Withholding tax type: Posting at time of Invoice” screen, make the following New Entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Type

I4

Page 62 of 254

Page 63: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Description Description of the Withholding Tax Type

INV-RENT-TDS SEC.194I(HuF/Ind)

Calculation

Base Amount -Gross Amount

Base amount to calculate tax

Select the Gross Amount radio button

Rounding Rule

Round W/tax amnt. up

Rounding rule of W/holding Tax

Select the Round W/tax amount Up radio button

Post W/tax amount

Posting of With-holding tax

Activate the Post W/tax amount check box

Accumulation Type

No Accumulation

Accumulation of W/holding Tax

Select the No Accumulation Radio button

Control Data

W/tax Base Manual

Maintenance of with holding tax base as manual

Activate the W/tax Base Manual Check box

Manual W/tax amount

Maintenance of with holding tax as manual

Activate the W/tax amount Manual Check box

No Cert. Numbering

Generation of standard Certificate (not TDS certificates)

Activate the No. Certificate Numbering Check box

Base amount – W/Tax Code Level

Base amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Base amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

Withholding tax amount – W/tax Code level

Tax amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Withholding tax amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

9. To save the entries use the Save Icon.

10. To add some more tax types on the Change View “Define Withholding tax type: Posting at time of Invoice” screen, make the following New Entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Type

I5

Page 63 of 254

Page 64: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Description Description of the Withholding Tax Type

INV-RENT-TDS SEC.194I(Others)

Calculation

Base Amount -Gross Amount

Base amount to calculate tax

Select the Gross Amount radio button

Rounding Rule

Round W/tax amnt. up

Rounding rule of W/holding Tax

Select the Round W/tax amount Up radio button

Post W/tax amount

Posting of With-holding tax

Activate the Post W/tax amount check box

Accumulation Type

No Accumulation

Accumulation of W/holding Tax

Select the No Accumulation Radio button

Control Data

W/tax Base Manual

Maintenance of with holding tax base as manual

Activate the W/tax Base Manual Check box

Manual W/tax amount

Maintenance of with holding tax as manual

Activate the W/tax amount Manual Check box

No Cert. Numbering

Generation of standard Certificate (not TDS certificates)

Activate the No. Certificate Numbering Check box

Base amount – W/Tax Code Level

Base amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Base amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

Withholding tax amount – W/tax Code level

Tax amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Withholding tax amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

11. To save the entries use the Save Icon.

12. To add some more tax types on the Change View “Define Withholding tax type: Posting at time of Invoice” screen, make the following New Entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Type

I6

Page 64 of 254

Page 65: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Description Description of the Withholding Tax Type

INV-COMMISSION-TDS SEC.194D

Calculation

Base Amount -Gross Amount

Base amount to calculate tax

Select the Gross Amount radio button

Rounding Rule

Round W/tax amnt. up

Rounding rule of W/holding Tax

Select the Round W/tax amount Up radio button

Post W/tax amount

Posting of With-holding tax

Activate the Post W/tax amount check box

Accumulation Type

No Accumulation

Accumulation of W/holding Tax

Select the No Accumulation Radio button

Control Data

W/tax Base Manual

Maintenance of with holding tax base as manual

Activate the W/tax Base Manual Check box

Manual W/tax amount

Maintenance of with holding tax as manual

Activate the W/tax amount Manual Check box

No Cert. Numbering

Generation of standard Certificate (not TDS certificates)

Activate the No. Certificate Numbering Check box

Base amount – W/Tax Code Level

Base amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Base amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

Withholding tax amount – W/tax Code level

Tax amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Withholding tax amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

13. To save the entries use the Save Icon.

7.8.2 Defining Withholding Tax Types for Payment Posting

Use The purpose of this activity is to define the withholding tax type for deduction of TDS at the time of payment.

Page 65 of 254

Page 66: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation Withholding Tax Type Define Withholding Tax Type for Payment Posting

2. On the Change View “Define Withholding tax type definition: Posting at time of Payment” screen, make the following New Entries for the Country IN:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Type

P1

Description Description of the Withholding Tax Type

PAYMENT-CONTRACTORS.-TDS SEC.194C

Calculation

Base Amount -Gross Amount

Base amount to calculate tax

Select the Gross Amount radio button

Rounding Rule

Round W/tax amnt. up

Rounding rule of W/holding Tax

Select the Round W/tax amount Up radio button

Cash Discount – Cash discount Pre W/tax

Tax Deduction on net of Discounts

Select the C/disc pre W/tx radio button

Post W/tax amount

Posting of With-holding tax

Activate the Post W/tax amount check box

Accumulation Type

No Accumulation

Accumulation of W/holding Tax

Select the No Accumulation Radio button

Control Data

W/tax Base Manual

Maintenance of with holding tax base as manual

Activate the W/tax Base Manual Check box

Manual W/tax amount

Maintenance of with holding tax as manual

Activate the W/tax amount Manual Check box

No Cert. Numbering

Generation of standard Certificate (not TDS certificates)

Activate the No. Certificate Numbering Check box

Page 66 of 254

Page 67: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Base amount – W/Tax Code Level

Base amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Base amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

Withholding tax amount – W/tax Code level

Tax amount determination at Type level or code level

Select the Withholding tax amount from the Withholding Tax Code level radio button

Central Invoice – No Central Invoice

Receipt of Invoice – Central Invoice

Select the radio button for No Central Invoice

Minimum Check – Minimum Check at Item level

Minimum Check at item level

Select the radio button for minimum check at item level

3. To create the other Payment Withholding tax Type copy the above to the following Withholding Tax Types:

Withholding Tax Type Key

Description of With holding Tax Type for Payment Posting

P2 PAY-ADVERT.CONTRACTS-TDS SEC.194C

P3 PAY-PROFESSIONAL FEES-TDS SEC.194J

P4 PAY-RENT-TDS SEC.194I(HuF/Ind)

P5 PAY-RENT-TDS SEC.194I(Others)

P6 PAY-COMMISSION-TDS SEC.194D

All other values remain same as P1 type which is defined in the previous step.

4. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.8.3 Defining Rounding Rule for Withholding Tax Types

Use The purpose of this activity is to maintain the rounding rule. At the time of posting withholding tax system will round the values to be posted for withholding tax as per the rounding rules.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation

Page 67 of 254

Page 68: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Withholding Tax Type Define Rounding Rule for Withholding Tax Types

2. On the Change View “Withholding Tax Rounding Rules”: Overview screen, make the following New Entries:

Company Code Withholding Tax Type

Currency Unit Note

BP01 I1 INR 100

BP01 I2 INR 100

BP01 I3 INR 100

BP01 I4 INR 100

BP01 I5 INR 100

BP01 I6 INR 100

BP01 P1 INR 100

BP01 P2 INR 100

BP01 P3 INR 100

BP01 P4 INR 100

BP01 P5 INR 100

BP01 P6 INR 100

3. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.8.4 Defining Withholding Tax Codes

Use The purpose of this activity is to define the withholding tax codes. The rates are maintained through withholding tax code. The withholding tax rate contains Base withholding tax rate and Surcharge on base with holding tax rate. This can be maintained as two different with holding tax codes (i.e. base withholding tax rate in one code and surcharge in another code) or together withholding tax rate can be maintained. Base withholding tax rate and surcharge rate together one withholding tax code is defined.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation Withholding Tax Codes Define Withholding Tax Codes

Page 68 of 254

Page 69: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

2. On the Change View “Withholding tax Code”: Overview screen, make the following New Entries for the Country IN

W/Tax Type

W/Tax Code

Description of W/tax Code

Official W/tax Key

Base amt. % Subject to tax

Posting Indicator

Withholding Tax Rate

I1 I1 INV-CONTS.CORP-TDS SEC.194C-2.10%

194C 100 1 2.10%

I2 I2 INV-ADV.CONTS.CORP-TDS SEC194C-1.1%

194C 100 1 1.1%

I3 I3 INV-PROF/TECH..CORP-TDS SEC.194J-5.500%

194J 100 1 5.500%

I4 I4 INV-RENT.HUF/INDIVIDUAL-TDS SEC.194I-15%

194I 100 1 15%

I5 I5 INV-RENT.CORP/OTHER-TDS SEC.194I-22.00%

194I 100 1 22.00%

I6 I6 INV-COMMISSN.CORP-TDS SEC.194D-5.500%

194D 100 1 5.500%

P1 P1 PAY-CONTS.CORP-TDS SEC.194C-2.200%

194C 100 1 2.200%

P2 P2 PAY-ADV.CONTS.CORP-TDS SEC194C-1.100%

194C 100 1 1.100%

P3 P3 PAY-PROF/TECH..CORP-TDS SEC.194J-5.500%

194J 100 1 5.500%

P4 P4 PAY-RENT.HUF/INDIVIDUAL-TDS SEC.194I-15%

194I 100 1 15%

P5 P5 PAY-RENT.CORP/OTHER-TDS SEC.194I-22.000%

194I 100 1 22.000%

Page 69 of 254

Page 70: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

W/Tax Type

W/Tax Code

Description of W/tax Code

Official W/tax Key

Base amt. % Subject to tax

Posting Indicator

Withholding Tax Rate

P6 P6 PAY-COMMISSN.CORP-TDS SEC.194D-5.500%

194D 100 1 5.500%

3. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.8.5 Checking Recipient Types

Use The purpose of this activity is to define the Recipient Types. Recipient Types are used for tax payment and tax reporting. Recipient Types will be assigned in the Vendor Master Record.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings Check Recipient Types

2. On the Change View “Vendor Types of Recipient for Withholding tax Type”: Overview screen, make the following entries for the Country IN

Withholding Tax Type

Recipient Type Text

I1 CO Companies

I1 OT Others

I2 CO Companies

I2 OT Others

I3 CO Companies

I3 OT Others

I4 OT Others

I5 CO Companies

I6 CO Companies

I6 OT Others

P1 CO Companies

P1 OT Others

Page 70 of 254

Page 71: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Withholding Tax Type

Recipient Type Text

P2 CO Companies

P2 OT Others

P3 CO Companies

P3 OT Others

P4 OT Others

P5 CO Companies

P6 CO Companies

P6 OT Others

3. To save the entries use the Save Icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.8.6 Maintaining Tax Due Dates

UseThe purpose of this activity is to identify the Tax Payable due date from the date of deduction / posting.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Basic Settings India Maintain Tax Due Dates

2. On the Change View “Tax Due Dates”: Overview screen, make the following entries:

Country Official Withholding Tax Key

Recipient Type

No. of Days

IN 194C CO 777

IN 194C OT 777

IN 194D CO 777

IN 194D OT 777

IN 194I CO 777

IN 194I OT 777

IN 194J CO 777

IN 194J OT 777

IN 195 CO

Page 71 of 254

Page 72: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Country Official Withholding Tax Key

Recipient Type

No. of Days

IN 195 OT

3. To save the entries use Save icon or Ctrl+S.

7.8.7 Maintaining Surcharge Rates

UseThe purpose of this activity is to identify the surcharge rate which is included in the base rate of Withholding Tax Code. The surcharge rates will be used by the system for reporting.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation India Surcharges Maintain Surcharge Rates (Surcharges combined with basic WH Tax Codes)

2. On the Change View “Surcharge Rates”: Overview screen, make the following New Entries:

Company Code

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Code

Recipient Type Surcharge

BP01 I1 I1 CO 10%

BP01 I2 I2 CO 10%

BP01 I3 I3 CO 10%

BP01 I4 I4 OT

BP01 I5 I5 CO 10%

BP01 I6 I6 CO 10%

BP01 P1 P1 CO 10%

BP01 P2 P2 CO 10%

BP01 P3 P3 CO 10%

BP01 P4 P4 OT

BP01 P5 P5 CO 10%

BP01 P6 P6 CO 10%

3. To save the entries use save icon or Ctrl+S.

Page 72 of 254

Page 73: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

7.8.8 Assigning Types of Companies to Withholding Tax Codes

UseThe purpose of this activity is to identify the types of withholding tax codes and the same will be used in the reports.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation India Settings for Annual Returns Assign types of Companies to withholding tax code

2. On the Change View “Assign Types of Company To Withholding Tax Codes”: Overview screen, make the following New Entries

Country Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Code

Company Type

IN I1 I1 Contractors

IN I1 I9 Contractors

IN I2 I2 Advertising

IN I2 I9 Advertising

IN P1 P1 Contractors

IN P1 P9 Contractors

IN P2 P2 Advertising

IN P2 P9 Advertising

IN W1 W1 Contractors

IN wa wa Contractors

3. To save the entries use Save icon or Ctrl+S.

7.9 Extended Withholding Tax – Company Code Assignment

7.9.1 Assigning Withholding Tax Type to Company Code

UseThe purpose of this activity is to assign the withholding tax types defined to the Company Code.

Page 73 of 254

Page 74: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Company Code Assign Withholding Tax Types to Company Code

2. On the Change View “Withholding tax information for company code per W/tax:” screen, make the following New Entries:

Company Code Withholding Tax Type

With/tax agent

W/Tax obligated from

W/Tax obligated to

Customer data subject to W/tax

BP01 I1 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 I2 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 I3 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 I4 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 I5 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 I6 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 P1 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 P2 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 P3 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 P4 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 P5 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

BP01 P6 Activate 01.04.2003 31.12.2999 Activate

3. To save the entries use save icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.9.2 Activating Extended Withholding Tax Code

UseThe purpose of this activity is to activate the extended withholding tax code for the Company Code. SAP R/3 system supports two types of withholding taxes

Standard Withholding Tax (Classic)

Extended Withholding Tax

Prerequisites Take a decision to activate the extended withholding tax functionality or classic withholding functionality.

Page 74 of 254

Page 75: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Once you have activated extended withholding tax, you cannot return to using previous withhholding tax processing.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Company Code Activate Extended withholding tax

2. On the Change View “Enhanced Withholding tax functions active”: Overview screen, make the following entry:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Company Code Company Code BP01 Defaulted

Company Name Name of Company Code

India Best Practices Ltd Defaulted

Ext.W/Tax Extended Withholding

Activate the check box Activate the extended with holding tax

3. To save the entries use save icon or use Ctrl+S.

7.9.3 Defining Accounts to post the Withholding Tax

UseThe purpose of this activity is to assign the General Ledger Master records to post the withholding tax deducted, which will be paid to the government subsequently.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Postings Accounts for withholding tax Define Accounts for Withholding Tax to be paid over

2. On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting – Accounts screen, make the following entries for the Chart of Accounts CAIN:

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Code

General Ledger Account

I1 I1 13113940

I1 I9 13113940

I2 I2 13113940

Page 75 of 254

Page 76: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Withholding Tax Type

Withholding Tax Code

General Ledger Account

I2 I9 13113940

I3 I3 13113940

I3 I9 13113940

I4 I4 13113940

I5 I5 13113940

I6 I6 13113940

I6 I9 13113940

P1 P1 13113940

P1 P9 13113940

P2 P2 13113940

P2 P9 13113940

P3 P3 13113940

P3 P9 13113940

P4 P4 13113940

P5 P5 13113940

P6 P6 13113940

P6 P9 13113940

3. To save the entries use save icon or press Ctrl+S.

One General Ledger account has been assigned for all withholding tax types and codes to post the deduction. If required different general ledger account can be maintained in the combination of Withholding Tax Type and Withholding Tax Code.

General ledger account needs to be maintained on open item basis to perform the withholding tax clearing. Make the necessary changes in the General ledger account manually.

7.10 Maintaining Number Group for Internal Challan Numbers

UseYou are going to create number range groups

Procedure

Page 76 of 254

Page 77: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SM30

Menu System Services Table Maintenance Extended Table Maintenance

2. On the Maintain Table Views: Initial screen, enter the table/ view name J_1IEWTNUMGR_1 and choose the Maintain push button.

3. On the Change View Number Groups for Internal Challan Numbers – EWT India: Section Code screen, make the following entries

Company Code Section Code Off. W/Tax Key

Number Group

BP01 BP01 194C 10

BP01 BP01 194J 10

BP01 BP01 194I 10

BP01 BP01 194D 10

BP01 BP01 194A 10

4. To save the entries use save icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.11 Assignment of Number Ranges

7.11.1 Assigning Number Ranges to Number Groups

UseIn this IMG activity, you assign each number group to a number range.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Postings India Remittance Challan Assign Number Ranges to Number Groups

2. On the Change View “INTERNAL NO RANGE FOR CHALLANS-EWT INDIA:”OVERVIEW screen make the following entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Number Group Number Group 10

Page 77 of 254

Page 78: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Int NR Internal Number Range Key

02

3. To save the entries use Save icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.11.2 Maintaining Number Ranges

UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the number ranges that the system is to use to number the remittance challans while posting the TDS Challan.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Postings India Remittance Challan Maintain Number Ranges

2. On the Internal number ranges for Challan screen, select the Change Groups push button.

3. On the Maintain Number Ranges Groups screen, select the check box Group without text.

4. Select the from the menu Interval Maintain and assign the Company Code BP01 on the pop screen

5. Select on the “Maintain Number Range Intervals” screen, select the menu Edit Insert Year or Insert Year push button.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Year Year for which number range being defined

2003

From Number Starting number of series

1000

To Number Ending number of series

1999

6. If the number group is in un-assigned group, select the number group ‘10’ (put the cursor on the number group 10 and press the select element icon)

7. Select the check box “Group without Text” and press the Assign Element Group push button.

8. To save the entries use save icon or press Ctrl+S.

The challan numbers are year dependent. In case you need to maintain the number range for new Fiscal year, maintain the number range to the new fiscal year, use the following additional steps.

Page 78 of 254

Page 79: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

9. To maintain the number range for another fiscal year, select the check box “Group without Text” on the “Maintain Number Range Groups” screen and select from the menu Interval Maintain and assign the Company Code as BP01.

10. Select the number rage 2003, which displayed in the screen, on the “Maintain Number Range Intervals” screen, select the menu Edit Insert Year.

11. Maintain the number ranges by assigning the Fiscal Year, number series from and number series to.

12. To save the entries use save icon or press Ctrl+S.

7.11.3 Maintaining Number Groups and SAP Script Forms

UseThe purpose of this activity is to specify which SAP script forms will be used to use to print the withholding tax certificates.

PrerequisitesCheck SAP Script Form J_1IEWTCERT which is delivered with the Standard system for generation of withholding tax certificates. If required copy from the 000 client to the client you are using.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SM30

Menu System Services Table Maintenance Extended Table Maintenance

2. On the Maintain Table Views: Initial screen, enter the table/ view name J_1IEWT_CERT_N and choose the Maintain push button.

3. On “Change view “SAP Script Forms / Section indicators for EWT Certificate” screen, make the following New Entries.

Company Code Section Code

Off. With holding Tax key

Section Type

From Number Group

BP01 BP01 194C J_1IEWT_CERT 11

BP01 BP01 194D J_1IEWT_CERT 16

BP01 BP01 194I J_1IEWT_CERT 14

BP01 BP01 194J J_1IEWT_CERT 13

BP01 BP01 194A J_1IEWT_CERT 19

4. To save the entries use save icon or press Ctrl+S

Page 79 of 254

Page 80: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

7.11.4 Assigning Number Ranges to Number Groups

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Postings India Withholding Tax Certificates for Vendors and Customers Assign Number Ranges to Number Groups

2. To maintain on the “Change View “Number Ranges for Withholding Tax Certificates”: Overview” screen, make the following New Entries.

Number Group Internal Number Range

11 11

13 13

14 14

16 16

19 19

3. To save the entries use save icon or press Ctrl+S

7.11.5 Maintaining Number Ranges

UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the number ranges that the system is to use to number the Withholding Tax Certificates.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Postings India Withholding Tax Certificates for Vendors and Customers Maintain Number Ranges

Page 80 of 254

Page 81: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

2. To maintain on the “Withholding Tax Certificates (India)” screen, select the Maintain Groups push button.

3. The Groups defined in the previous step will be appearing on the screen i.e. 11, 13, 14, 16, and 19.

The certificate numbers are year dependent. In case of New Fiscal year, maintain the number range to the new fiscal year, Use the following additional steps:

4. Select the check box above the number range group ID on the “Maintain number range groups” screen.

5. Select from the menu Interval Maintain and assign the Company Code as BP01.

6. On the “Maintain Number Range Intervals” screen select the number rage 2003 which displayed in the screen, and select from the menu Edit Insert Year.

7. Maintain the number ranges by assigning the Fiscal Year, number series from and number series to, for each Number group. Number Range should not overlap between the number groups.

Number group

Fiscal year From Number To Number Current Number

11 2003 110000 119999

13 2003 130000 139999

14 2003 140000 149999

16 2003 160000 169999

19 2003 190000 199999

8. The group text not transported and maintain manually.

9. To save the entries use save icon or press Ctrl+S.

8 Configuration CATTs

8.1 Maintaining Address for Business Place

UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the Business Place Address using the CATT.

If address maintained along with Creation of Business Place manually, no need to run this CATT.

PrerequisitesBusiness Place must be created in the system.

Procedure

Page 81 of 254

Page 82: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Address already maintained at step 3.5 above.

8.2 Maintaining Address for Section Code

UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the Section Code Address using the CATT.

If address maintained along with Creation of Section Code manually, no need to run this CATT.

PrerequisitesSection Code must be created in the system.

Procedure Address already maintained at step 3.5 above.

8.3 Import of Tax Codes objects list.

UseIn this activity you are gong to create batch input session for importing tax codes request.

ProcedureTax codes already created manually at step 3.1.1 above.

9 Master Data

9.1 Creating Service Master

UseIn this activity you are going to create service master record.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

Page 82 of 254

Page 83: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

SAP Easy Access menu Logistics Materials Management Service Master Service Service Master

Transaction Code AC03

2. Manually create this by using variant file SMB14_AC02_C410_J82_01.TXT.

9.2 Creating Vendor Master

UseIn this activity you are going to create vendor master record.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP Easy Access menu Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

Transaction Code XK01

2. Manually create this by using the variant file SMB14_XK01_C510_J82_01.TXT.

Page 83 of 254

Page 84: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

ContentsJ83 - Procurement of Imported Materials: Installation Guide........................................................85

1 Purpose................................................................................................................................. 85

2 Preparation............................................................................................................................ 85

2.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................85

2.2 Uploading the Installation Role....................................................................................85

3 Installation............................................................................................................................. 86

3.1 Master Data Creation..................................................................................................86

3.1.1 Materials Master Creation.......................................................................................86

3.1.2 Vendor Master Creation..........................................................................................87

3.1.3 CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination.......................................87

3.1.4 CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination............................................................88

3.1.5 CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details...............................................................88

Page 84 of 254

Page 85: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

J83 - Procurement of Imported Materials: Installation Guide

10PurposeThis installation guide provides the information you need to set up the configuration of this building block using automated configuration tools, such as BC Sets. If you are not familiar with working with the automated configuration tools, refer to the document Essential Information.

If you do not want to use the automated installation process and prefer to configure this building block manually, refer to the configuration guide of this building block.

11Preparation

11.1 PrerequisitesThis building block provides the Procurement of Imported Materials in MM functionality.

Before starting with the installation, complete the following activities:

Read the documentation building block Essential Information, which you need for a Best Practices for mySAP All-in-One installation.

Install the Organizational Structure building block J02.

Install the FI building block J03.

Install the MM building block J05.

Install the Procurement of Stock Materials building block J81.

11.2 Uploading the Installation Role

UseBefore you start with the installation using the automated procedures described in this installation guide, upload the installation role and assign it to your user. If you prefer to carry out some of the steps manually, refer to the configuration guide of this building block.

This building block provides one or more installation roles, which enable you to access all the transactions required for the installation from the relevant system. The following roles are available for this building block:

Technical name Description File name for upload

/SMB14/J83_01IInstallation Role of J83 - Procurement of Imported Materials _SMB14_J83_01I.SAP

Procedure

Page 85 of 254

Page 86: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

For details on how to upload the installation roles to the system and how to work with the roles, refer to the document Essential Information.

12Installation

12.1 Master Data Creation

UseYou have to process the subsequent activities to complete the procurement process of imported materials in MM functionality.

ProcedureFollow the steps in the installation role as described in this installation guide.

BC Set activation logs can provide help if warning or error messages occur.

Should errors be listed in the activation logs, the relevant BC Sets must be processed again separately.

Prerequisites You have set the flag for Automatic Recording of Changes using transaction SCC4 Maintain Client and saved your entry.

12.1.1 Materials Master Creation

UseIn this activity you are going to upload material which is used in J83 building block.

Procedure3. Maintain the external CATT variant SMB14_MM01_C110_J81_J83_01.TXT.

4. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Role Menu Installation Role of J83 - Procurement of Imported Materials Master Data Creation Materials Master Creation

Transaction Code /SMB14/C110_J81_02

5. Enter the correct path for the variant file.

6. Choose Execute to start the CATT procedure /SMB14/MM01_C110_J81.

7. Check the CATT log (optional) and go back to the installation role.

Result

Page 86 of 254

Page 87: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Material is uploaded for use in procurement process.

12.1.2 Vendor Master Creation

UseIn this activity you are going to upload vendor master for use in J83 building block

Procedure1. Maintain the external CATT variant SMB14_XK01_C210_J81_J83_01.TXT.

2. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Role Menu Installation Role of J83 - Procurement of Imported Materials Master Data Creation Vendor Master Creation

Transaction Code /SMB14/C210_J81_02

3. Enter the correct path for the variant file.

4. Choose Execute to start the CATT procedure /SMB14/XK01_C210_J81.

5. Check the CATT log (optional) and go back to the installation role.

Result Vendors are uploaded for use in procurement process.

12.1.3 CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination

UseIn this activity you are going to upload material and chapter ids combination, which are used in subsequent transactions

Procedure4. Maintain the external CATT variant SMB14_J1ID_C320_J81_J83_01.TXT.

5. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Role Menu Installation Role of J83 - Procurement of Imported Materials Master Data Creation CIN: Material and Chapter ID Combina

Transaction Code /SMB14/C320_J81_02

6. Enter the correct path for the variant file.

7. Choose Execute to start the CATT procedure /SMB14/J1ID_C320_J81.

8. Check the CATT log (optional) and go back to the installation role.

Page 87 of 254

Page 88: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

12.1.4 CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination

UseIn this activity you are going to upload master data relating to CENVAT determination, which is used in subsequent transactions.

Procedure4. Maintain the external CATT variant SMB14_J1ID_C330_J81_J83_01.TXT.

5. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Role Menu Installation Role of J83 - Procurement of Imported Materials Master Data Creation CIN: CENVAT Determination

Transaction Code /SMB14/C330_J81_02

6. Enter the correct path for the variant file.

7. Choose Execute to start the CATT procedure /SMB14/J1ID_C330_J81.

8. Check the CATT log (optional) and go back to the installation role.

12.1.5 CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details

UseIn this activity you are going to upload vendor excise details, which are used in subsequent transactions.

Procedure1. Maintain the external CATT variant SMB14_J1ID_C340_J81_J83_01.TXT.

2. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Role Menu Installation Role of J83 - Procurement of Imported Materials Master Data Creation CIN: Vendor Excise Details

Transaction Code /SMB14/C340_J81_02

3. Enter the correct path for the variant file.

4. Choose Execute to start the CATT procedure /SMB14/J1ID_C340_J81.

5. Check the CATT log (optional) and go back to the installation role.

Page 88 of 254

Page 89: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

ContentsProcurement of Capital Material to Manufacturing Plant...............................................................90

1 Purpose................................................................................................................................. 90

2 Preparation............................................................................................................................ 90

2.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................90

3 Configuration......................................................................................................................... 91

3.1 Release Procedure for Purchase Orders.....................................................................91

3.1.1 Creating Characteristic............................................................................................91

3.1.2 Creating Class.........................................................................................................92

3.1.3 Defining the Release Procedure for Purchase Orders............................................93

3.1.4 Assigning Values to Release Procedure.................................................................95

3.2 Master Data................................................................................................................. 96

3.2.1 Creating Materials Master.......................................................................................96

3.2.2 Creating Vendor Master..........................................................................................96

3.2.3 Creating CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination........................96

3.2.4 Creating CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination.............................................97

3.2.5 Creating CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details................................................97

Page 89 of 254

Page 90: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Procurement of Capital Material to Manufacturing Plant

13PurposeThis configuration guide provides the information you need to set up the configuration of this building block manually.

If you do not want to configure manually and prefer an automated installation process using BC Sets and other tools, refer to the installation guide of this building block.

14Preparation

14.1 PrerequisitesIf you want to use this building block, you must have installed the following building blocks:

Building Block # Description

J02 Organizational Structure

J03 Financial Accounting

J05 Materials Management

J81 Procurement of Stock Materials

Page 90 of 254

Page 91: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

15Configuration

15.1 Release Procedure for Purchase Orders

UseThis activity is included here to demonstrate how the SAP release procedure works. The aim of this IMG activity is to replace manually written authorization procedures using signatures with an electronic procedure, while maintaining the dual control principle. The person responsible processes the purchasing document in the system, marking it with an "electronic signature" which can give the document legal force.

15.1.1 Creating Characteristic

Procedure14. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code CT04

IMG Menu Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Release Procedure for Purchase Orders Edit Characteristic

15. On the Create Characteristic screen, enter the characteristic POVAL and choose Create.

16. Select the Addnl Data tab page and make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Table Name R CEKKO

Field Name R GNETW

17. Choose Enter to continue. The information message Format Data taken from ABAP dictionary appears.

18. Choose Enter to continue.

19. Choose the Basic Data tab page and make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Description R Total net order value

Status R Released

Data Type R Currency format Selected by system

Number of characters

R 15

Decimal places R 2

Currency R INR

Page 91 of 254

Page 92: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Interval vals allowed

R Set this indicator

Multiple Values R Select the Multiple Values radio button

20. Choose Enter to complete the entries

21. Save the characteristic.

15.1.2 Creating Class

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code CL02

IMG Menu Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Release Procedure for Purchase Orders Edit Class

2. On the Class screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Class R PORELPROC Name used to uniquely identify a class within a class type

Class Type R 032

Choose Create or white paper to create new class.

Description R Purchase order release procedure

Status R Released

Select the Char. tab page to enter the characteristic name.

Characteristic R POVAL Created in previous step

3. Choose Enter.

4. Save the characteristic.

ResultClass type 032: Class PORELPROC is created.

Page 92 of 254

Page 93: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

15.1.3 Defining the Release Procedure for Purchase Orders

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose the following IMG menu path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Release Procedure for Purchase Orders Define Release Procedure for Purchase Orders

2. Start the IMG activity. The Choose activity dialog box appears.

Defining Release Groups

1. Double-click Release Groups.

2. On the Change View “Release Groups: External Purchasing Document”: Overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Rel. Group Release Group R 02

Class Class Name R PORELPROC Created in above step

Description R PO Release Procedure

3. Choose Enter to complete the entries

4. Save your entries.

5. Choose Exit to go back to the dialog box.

Defining Release Codes

1. Double-click Release Codest.

2. On the <screen name> screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Grp Release group R 02 Created in above step

Code Release Code R 01

Workflow O Leave it blank

Description R Chief Executive

3. Choose Enter to complete the entries.

4. Save the entries.

Page 93 of 254

Page 94: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

5. Choose Exit to go back to the dialog box.

Setting the Release Indicator

1. Double-click Release Indicator.

2. Choose New Entries and make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Release ind. Release Indicator R 1

Released O Leave it blank

Chgable Changeability O 4

Description R Purchase Order Blocked

3. Go to second line and enter the following values:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Release ind. Release indicator R 2

Released O Select Check box

Chgable Changeability O 6

Description R Purchase Order Released

4. Choose Enter to complete the entries

5. Save the entries.

6. Choose Exit to go back to the dialog box.

Defining the Release Strategies

1. Double-click Release Strategies.

2. On the Change View “Release Strategies: External Purchasing Documents”: Det screen, choose New Entries.

3. On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Release group Release group R 02

Rel. strategy Release strategy R S1

R Capital Items Release

Release Code R 01

4. Choose enter to complete the entries.

Defining the Release Prerequisites

1. Choose Release prerequisites and choose enter.

Page 94 of 254

Page 95: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Since in this scenario, you use the single level release procedure, you do not need to define the release prerequisites, here.

2. Choose Release statuses , system will give a popup screen system will default 1 and 2 entries one by one as a default. Choose Continue.

3. Choose Classification , here you can see Total net order value is displayed, please input >= 1000000.00 INR value in the white placed and choose Enter.

4. Choose Next Screen to continue.

5. If you want to simulate the release procedure you can choose Release Simulation .

6. Choose enter to complete the entries.

7. To save the settings choose Save or Control + S.

ResultYou have defined a release procedure.

15.1.4 Assigning Values to Release Procedure

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code CL20N

SAP R/3 Menu Cross-Application Components Classification System Assignments Assign Object to Classes

2. On the Assign Object to Classes screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Class Type R Enter the class type 032 and choose Enter to assign values

This is the class type for the release strategy

Release group R 02

Rel. Strategy Release strategy R S1

3. Choose Enter.

The system displays the class name in the Assignments screen area, Double-click on the class name.

4. The system displays the characteristic name Total net order value. Assign the value <1000000.00 INR > in the Value field.

5. Choose Enter to complete the entries.

6. Save the characteristic.

Page 95 of 254

Page 96: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 96 of 254

Page 97: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

15.2 Master Data

15.2.1 Creating Materials Master

UseIn this activity you create materials.

Procedure8. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Logistics Materials Management Materials Master Material Create (General) Immediately

Transaction Code MM01

9. To create the material master data, use the variant file SMB14_MM01_C110_J81_J84_01.TXT.

15.2.2 Creating Vendor Master

UseIn this activity you create a vendor master record.

Procedure6. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

Transaction Code XK01

7. To create the vendor master record, use the variant file SMB14_XK01_C210_J81_J84_01.TXT.

15.2.3 Creating CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination

UseIn this activity, you create the material and chapter-ID combination.

Page 97 of 254

Page 98: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Procedure9. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

10. On the Excise Rate Maintenance screen, select the Material and Chapter-Id Combination radio button and choose Maintain (F5). The Change View “View of Chapter ID and text”: Overview appears.

11. Create the chapter-ID combinations using the variant file SMB14_J1ID_C320_J81_J84_01.TXT.

15.2.4 Creating CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination

UseIn this activity, you upload master data relating to CENVAT determination.

Procedure9. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

10. Select the CENVAT radio button Determination and choose Maintain .

11. Create the master data using the variant file SMB14_J1ID_C330_J81_J84_01.TXT.

15.2.5 Creating CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details

UseIn this activity, you upload vendor excise details.

Procedure6. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Page 98 of 254

Page 99: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

SAP R/3 menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

7. Select the Vendor Excise Details radio button and choose Maintain.

8. To create the vendor excise details, use the variant file SMB14_J1ID_C340_J81_J84_01.TXT.

Page 99 of 254

Page 100: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

ContentsJ85 - Subcontracting without Payment of Excise Duty................................................................100

1 Purpose............................................................................................................................... 100

2 Preparation.......................................................................................................................... 100

2.1 Prerequisites..............................................................................................................100

3 Subcontracting without Payment of Excise Duty.................................................................100

3.1 Business Transactions Settings.................................................................................100

3.1.1 Subcontracting Attributes......................................................................................100

3.1.2 Maintaining Movement Type Groups.....................................................................102

3.2 Output Determination................................................................................................103

3.2.1 Maintaining Access Sequence for Subcontracting Challan...................................103

3.2.2 Maintaining Output Types for Subcontracting Challan..........................................104

3.2.3 Maintaining Output Determination Procedure........................................................105

3.2.4 Printer Determination by Plant / Storage Location.................................................106

3.3 Maintaining Output Conditions Record......................................................................107

4 Master Data......................................................................................................................... 108

4.1 Materials Master Creation..........................................................................................108

4.2 Vendor Master Creation.............................................................................................108

4.3 CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination.........................................109

4.4 CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination..............................................................109

4.5 CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details.................................................................110

Page 100 of 254

Page 101: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

J85 - Subcontracting without Payment of Excise Duty

16PurposeThe purpose of this document is to describe the general configuration steps required to manually set up the configuration within the system landscape.

The Configuration Guide describes how to set up the configuration of a Building Block manually, without the support of automated configuration tools. If you want to use BC Sets and CATT procedures for an automated installation process, refer to the Building Block Installation Guide of the Materials Management IN Building Block.

17Preparation

17.1 PrerequisitesJ02 – Organizational Elements

J03 – Financial Accounting

J08 – Standard Cost and Profit Center Accounting

J05 – Materials Management

J81 – Procurement of Stock Materials

18Subcontracting without Payment of Excise Duty

18.1 Business Transactions Settings

18.1.1 Subcontracting Attributes

UseThe subcontracting attributes help determine conditions for a combination of an excise group, a transaction type, and a sub-transaction type. The conditions such as the number of excise items per subcontracting challan, if the non-excisable materials have to be filtered or not when the subcontracting challan is created, the movement type groups for issues and receipts and the hierarchy of determining the excise base value are mentioned here.

Procedure

Page 101 of 254

Page 102: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

22. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movement India Business Transactions Subcontracting Subcontracting Attributes

23. On the Subcontracting Scenario Attributes: Details screen, make the following entries:

24. Choose New Entries icon and maintain the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Excise Group Excise group R 10

Excise TT Excise transaction Type

R 57FC

Sub Transaction Type

Sub transaction Type

R 01

Sub Tran Type Text

Sub transaction type description

R 57FC CHALLAN

Subc. Period Subcontracting maximum number of days

R 180

Rate-subcontracting

Rate of subcontracting

O Leave it blank

Mvt Grp Issues Material issue movement groups

R 0001

Mvt Grp Receipt Materials receipts movement groups

R 0002

Filter Non excise Filter non excisable materials

O Leave it blank

EI Items Excise invoice items

O 10

No. range no. Number range R 01

Ass. Val. / Exc. Inv.

Assessable value R Assessable value table first then Excise Invoice

Select from drop down list

Subcon Out Type

Subcontracting output type

R J1IF

25. Choose Enter to complete the inputs.

26. Choose Save icon or press Control + S to save the entries.

ResultData was saved.

Page 102 of 254

Page 103: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

18.1.2 Maintaining Movement Type Groups

UseIn this setting you are going to group together movement types into two groups 0001 and 0002, i.e. issue movements and receiving movements.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Logistics General Tax on Goods Movement India Business Transactions Subcontracting Maintain Movement Type Groups

2. On the Subcontracting Scenario Attributes: Details screen, make the following entries:

3. Click on New Entries icon and maintain the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Mvt Group Movement type group

R 0001

Movement type Movement type R 122

Special stock Special stock type R Leave it blank

Mvt Group Movement type group

R 0001

Movement type Movement type R 102

Special stock Special stock type R Leave it blank

Mvt Group Movement type group

R 0001

Movement type Movement type R 541

Mvt Group Movement type group

R 0001

Movement type Movement type R 544

Special stock Special stock type R O

Special stock Special stock type R

Mvt Group Movement type group

R 0002

Movement type Movement type R 542

Special stock Special stock type R

Page 103 of 254

Page 104: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Mvt Group Movement type group

R 0002

Movement type Movement type R 101

Special stock Special stock type R

Mvt Group Movement type group

R 0002

Movement type Movement type R 543

Special stock Special stock type R O

4. Choose Enter to complete the inputs.

5. Choose Save icon or press Control + S to save the entries.

ResultData was saved.

18.2 Output Determination

18.2.1 Maintaining Access Sequence for Subcontracting Challan

UsePrinting of subcontracting challan is statutory requirement in India. For printing output type, access sequence is required.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Output Determination Maintain Access Sequence

While executing this transaction you will get an information message saying:

Caution: The table is cross-client

Message no. TB113

Page 104 of 254

Page 105: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

This indicate you require cross-client settings authorizations, please check with your

Basis Administrator.

2. On the Change View “Access sequence”: Overview screen, click on New Entries icon and maintain the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

AcSq Access sequence R ZJ1I

Description Description R Access Seq for J1IF SC Challan

Press Enter

Select ZJ1I access sequence line and Double click on Accesses from dialog structure menu path, system will take you to new screen; click New Entries for further entries.

AcNo Access sequence number

R 10

Tab Table name R 035

Description Description of table

R Plant Press Enter

3. Choose Enter to complete the inputs.

4. Choose Save icon or press Control + S to save the entries.

ResultData was saved.

18.2.2 Maintaining Output Types for Subcontracting Challan

UsePrinting of subcontracting challan is statutory requirement in India. After creating access sequence the following standard output type is used.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Output Determination Maintain Output Types

This is Standard settings offered by SAP R/3. Change or create this output type only if the original entry is missing in the standard system.

Page 105 of 254

Page 106: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

2. On the Display View “Output Types”: Overview screen, the following entries are available:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Select item with J1IF Subcontract Challan and click on Mail title and texts from Dialog Structure.

Application Application R ME Grayed out

Output Type Output type R J1IF Grayed out

Language Language R EN Grayed out

Title Title of output type R Subcontracting Challan India

Grayed out

Choose Processing routines in Dialog Structure.

Program Program name R J_1I57FPN

FORM routine FORM routine R ENTRY_57F4

Form Form R J_1I_57F4

Choose Partner functions in Dialog Structure.

Medium Print medium R Print Output

Funct Function R VN

Name Function name R Vendor

3. If you want to change any one of parameters press Change -> Display or Control+F4.

4. Choose Enter to complete the inputs.

5. Choose Save icon or press Control + S to save the entries.

ResultData was saved.

18.2.3 Maintaining Output Determination Procedure

UsePrinting of subcontracting challan is statutory requirement in India. For printing output type it has to be included in output determination procedure.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Output Determination Maintain Output Determination Procedure

Page 106 of 254

Page 107: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

There is already a procedure is defined, you are going to incorporate one more condition in the same procedure. Do not change other settings in this procedure.

2. System will give a new popup screen Conditions: Procedure select this line by double clicking on this line.

3. New popup screen ME0001 Inventory Management will come select this line item and choose Control Data.

4. On new screen Change View “Control data”: Overview, you will find there are already some condition types. Choose New Entries to incorporate new condition type created in above processes.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Step Step R 220

Cntr Counter R 10

CType Condition type R J1IF

5. Choose Enter to complete the inputs.

6. Choose Save icon or press Control + S to save the entries.

ResultData was saved.

18.2.4 Printer Determination by Plant / Storage Location

UsePrinting of subcontracting challan a printer has to be determined.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code OMJ3

IMG Menu Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Output Determination Printer Determination Printer Determination by Plant/Storage Location

2. System will take you to new screen Change View “Print Parameters”: Overview: and click New Entries icon to maintain the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Condition type Condition type R J1IF

Plant Plant R BP01

Storage location Storage location R SF01

Page 107 of 254

Page 108: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Output device Output device R Select printer from list

Print Immediately

Print immediately O Check this box

Release Release after output

O Check this box

Do the same process for another storage location

Condition type Condition type R J1IF

Plant Plant R BP01

Storage location Storage location R RM01

Output device Output device R Select printer from list

Print Immediately

Print Immediately O Check this box

Release Release after output

O Check this box

3. Choose Enter to complete the inputs.

4. Choose Save icon or press Control + S to save the entries.

ResultData was saved.

18.3 Maintaining Output Conditions Record

UsePrinting of subcontracting challan is statutory requirement in India. After completing total process of configuring output determination process a condition record must be created to control printer.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code MN21

IMG Menu Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Output Determination Maintain Conditions

Page 108 of 254

Page 109: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

2. System will give a new popup screen Create Condition: Inventory Mgmt, select this line by double clicking on this line.

3. New screen Create Output – Condition Records: Inventory Management will come, on this screen input output type J1IF in the field mentioned Output type.

4. System will take you to new screen Create Condition Records (Subcontract Challan): Fast Entry: and maintain the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Plant Plant code R BP01

PartF Partner name R VN

Medium Medium R 1

Date/Time Date and Time R 3

Select same item and click on Communication icon.

Output Device Output Device R BL11

5. Choose Enter to complete the inputs.

6. Choose Save icon or press Control + S to save the entries.

ResultData was saved.

19Master Data

19.1 Materials Master Creation

UseIn this activity you are going to create material.

Procedure10. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 menu Logistics Materials Management Materials Master Material Create (General) Immediately

Transaction Code MM01

11. Manually create this by using the variant file SMB14_MM01_C410_J85_01.TXT.

Page 109 of 254

Page 110: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

19.2 Vendor Master Creation

UseIn this activity you are going to create vendor master record.

Procedure8. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 menu Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

Transaction Code XK01

9. Manually create this by using the variant file SMB14_XK01_C210_J81_J85_01.TXT.

19.3 CIN Master Data – Material and Chapter ID Combination

UseIn this activity you are going to create material and chapter ids combination.

Procedure12. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

13. Choose radio button Material and Chapter-Id Combination and click Maintain (F5).

14. Manually create this by using the variant file SMB14_J1ID_C320_J81_J85_01.TXT.

19.4 CIN Master Data – CENVAT Determination

UseIn this activity you are going to upload master data relating to CENVAT determination.

Procedure12. Run the following activity

Page 110 of 254

Page 111: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

SAP R/3 menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

13. Choose radio button CENVAT Determination and click Maintain (F5).

14. Manually create this by using the variant file SMB14_J1ID_C330_J81_J85_01.TXT.

19.5 CIN Master Data – Vendor Excise Details

UseIn this activity you are going to upload vendor excise details.

Procedure9. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 menu – User menu

Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

10. Choose radio button Vendor Excise Details and click Maintain (F5).

11. Manually create this by using the variant file SMB14_J1ID_C340_J81_J85_01.TXT.

Page 111 of 254

Page 112: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

ContentsJ86 - Procurement of Trading Materials......................................................................................112

1 Purpose............................................................................................................................... 112

2 Preparation.......................................................................................................................... 112

2.1 Prerequisites..............................................................................................................112

3 Procurement of Trading Materials........................................................................................112

3.1 Master Data...............................................................................................................112

3.1.1 Materials Master Creation.....................................................................................112

3.1.2 Vendor Master Creation........................................................................................112

Page 112 of 254

Page 113: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

J86 - Procurement of Trading Materials

20PurposeThis configuration guide provides the information you need to set up the configuration of this building block manually.

If you do not want to configure manually and prefer an automated installation process using BC Sets and other tools, refer to the installation guide of this building block.

21Preparation

21.1 PrerequisitesJ02 – Organizational Elements

J03 – Financial Accounting

J05 – Materials Management

22Procurement of Trading Materials

22.1 Master Data

22.1.1 Materials Master Creation

UseIn this activity you are going to create material.

Procedure12. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 menu Logistics Materials Management Materials Master Material Create (General) Immediately

Transaction Code MM01

13. Manually create this by using the variant file SMB14_MM01_C130_J81_J86_01.TXT.

22.1.2 Vendor Master Creation

Use

Page 113 of 254

Page 114: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

In this activity you are going to create vendor master record.

Procedure10. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 menu Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

Transaction Code XK01

11. Manually create this by using the variant file SMB14_XK01_C210_J81_J86_01.TXT.

Page 114 of 254

Page 115: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

ContentsJ91 – Export Sales under Bond..................................................................................................115

1 Purpose............................................................................................................................... 115

2 Preparation.......................................................................................................................... 115

2.1 Prerequisites..............................................................................................................115

3 Configuration....................................................................................................................... 115

3.1 Configuration of Export Sales under Bond.................................................................115

3.1.1 Assigning Billing Types to Delivery Types.............................................................115

3.1.2 Maintaining Number Range for Excise Bond.........................................................116

3.1.3 Making Settings for ARE-1 Procedure...................................................................117

3.1.4 Maintaining Number Range for ARE-1..................................................................118

3.1.5 Defining Processing Modes per Transaction.........................................................119

3.1.6 Defining Reference Documents per Transaction...................................................120

3.1.7 Maintaining Access sequences.............................................................................121

3.1.8 Maintaining Output Type.......................................................................................122

3.1.9 Specifying Printers................................................................................................125

3.2 Manual Activity..........................................................................................................126

3.2.1 Importing Form in to the Client..............................................................................126

3.3 Master Data...............................................................................................................127

3.3.1 Maintaining Settings for J1IB.................................................................................127

3.3.2 Maintaining Postal Address...................................................................................127

3.3.3 Maintaining Rejection Codes.................................................................................128

3.3.4 Creating Customer Master....................................................................................128

3.3.5 Customer CIN details............................................................................................128

3.3.6 Sales Views for Material master in New Sales Organization.................................129

3.3.7 Pricing Conditions.................................................................................................129

3.3.8 Tax Conditions......................................................................................................130

3.3.9 Condition record for Output...................................................................................130

Page 115 of 254

Page 116: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

J91 – Export Sales under Bond

23PurposeThis configuration guide provides the information about the Exports Sales under Bond.

If you do not want to configure manually and prefer an automated installation process using BC Sets and other tools, refer to the installation guide of this building block.

24Preparation

24.1 Prerequisites J02 Organizational Elements Building Block

J03 Financial Accounting Building Block

J04 Sales and Distribution Building Block

J05 Materials Management Building Block

J81 Procurement of Stock Material Building Block

J64 Production planning Building Block

25Configuration

25.1 Configuration of Export Sales under Bond

25.1.1 Assigning Billing Types to Delivery Types

UseThe purpose of this activity is to define which Delivery Document type or Billing Document type can be referenced to create the Excise Invoice.

Procedure 27. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Outgoing Excise Invoices Assign Billing Types to Delivery Types

Page 116 of 254

Page 117: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Transaction Code SPRO

28. Click on New Entries, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Dlv Ty Delivery Type O LF User Entry

BillT Billing Type O F2 User Entry

Click on Save Icon

Result Delivery Types and Billing types defined for Excise Invoice type.

25.1.2 Maintaining Number Range for Excise Bond

UseNumber Range for the Excise Bond documents

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Tools Number Ranges

Transaction Code SPRO

2. On the Number Range Object Maintenance Screen, enter the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Object R J_1IBOND

Click on the Number Range Push Button

3. On the Excise Bonding: Bond number object Screen enter as follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Click on the Intervals Push Button

4. On the Maintain Number Range Intervals screen enter as follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Click on the Intervals Push Button

NO R 01

Page 117 of 254

Page 118: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Year R 2003

From Number R 10000

To Number R 99999

Current Number O 10000

Ext External num ber O

Click on PLUS icon

Click on Save Icon. You wil get one pop up window. Press Enter icon

Result

Number Range for Excise Bond is created.

25.1.3 Making Settings for ARE-1 Procedure

UseARE-1 Document is used as proof of Exports under the scenario, Export Sales under Bond. This is a legal document which needs to be submitted to Excise and Customs departments.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Exports Under Excise Regulations Exports Make Settings for ARE-1 Procedure

Transaction Code SPRO

2. Click on New Entries, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Series Grp R 12

ETT Excise Transaction Type

R ARE1

Exp.Prd Export Period R 180 User Entry

Reb.Prd Rebate Period R 180 User Entry

Fast Cr Fast Credit R Check the Box User Entry

No.Copies R 5 User Entry

Outp.Type Output Type R J1IB

Int.rate Interest Rate R 3 User Entry

Click on Save Icon

Page 118 of 254

Page 119: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Result Settings made for Series Group 12 for ARE- 1.

25.1.4 Maintaining Number Range for ARE-1

UseNumber Range for the ARE-1 Documents

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Tools Number Ranges

Transaction Code SPRO

2. On the Number Range Object Maintenance Screen, enter the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Object R J_1IARE1

Click on the Number Range Push Button

3. On the ARE1 Doc No Object Based on Series Group Screen enter as follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Series Group R 12

Click on the Intervals Push Button

4. On the Maintain Number Range Intervals screen enter as follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Click on the Intervals Push Button

NO R 01

Year R 2003

From Number R 1000

To Number R 5000

Current Number O 1000

Ext External num ber O

Page 119 of 254

Page 120: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Click on PLUS icon

Click on Save Icon

Result

Number Range for ARE-1 created.

25.1.5 Defining Processing Modes per Transaction

UseThis setting is required to make ARE-1 options active in the ARE-1 screen.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Exports Under Excise Regulations Transaction Configuration Define Processing Modes Per Transaction

Transaction Code SPRO

2. Click on New Entries, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Create ARE - 1

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Change

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Display

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Cancel

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Update

Active R Check the Check Box

Page 120 of 254

Page 121: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Reverse

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Post

Active R Check the Check Box

Result Settings for ARE-1 options made.

25.1.6 Defining Reference Documents per Transaction

UseThis setting is required to make ARE-1 POST option active in the ARE-1 screen.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Exports Under Excise Regulations Transaction Configuration Define Reference Documents Per Transaction

Transaction Code SPRO

2. Click on New Entries, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Create ARE - 1

Ref Doc Reference Document

R Outgoing Excise Invoice

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Change

Ref Doc Reference Document

R ARE 1 Internal Document

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Display

Page 121 of 254

Page 122: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Ref Doc Reference Document

R ARE 1 Internal Document

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Cancel

Ref Doc Reference Document

R ARE 1 Internal Document

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Update

Ref Doc Reference Document

R ARE 1 Internal Document

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Reverse

Ref Doc Reference Document

R ARE 1 Internal Document

Active R Check the Check Box

TCode Transaction code R J1IA101

Proc. mode Processing Mode R Post

Ref Doc Reference Document

R ARE 1 Internal Document

Active R Check the Check Box

Result Settings for ARE-1 POST made.

25.1.7 Maintaining Access sequences

UseAccess sequences are assigned to the output types.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Output Determination Maintain Access Sequences

Page 122 of 254

Page 123: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Transaction Code SPRO

2. On the Change View “Access sequences “ : Overview screen Click on New Entries, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

AcSq Access sequence R ZJ1B

Description R ARE

Select this line and Click on Accesses Folder

3. On the Change View “Accesses ” : Overview screen click on New Entries Push button and enter as follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

AcNo Access Number R 10

Tab Condition Table number

R 35

Description R Plant Default

Select this line and Click on Fields folder

4. On the Change View “Fields ” : Overview screen the data will be displays ad follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Access Access Sequence R ZJ1B Default

Table R 35 Default

Access Number R 10 Default

Condition R WERKS Default

Doc Struc R KOMPBME Default

Doc. Field R WERKS Default

Long field Lable R Plant Default

press Enter and click on Save Icon

Result Access sequence ZJ1B defined.

25.1.8 Maintaining Output Type

UseOutput Type for ARE-1 defined.

Page 123 of 254

Page 124: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Exports Under Excise Regulations Printouts of ARE Documents Maintain Output Type

Transaction Code M706

2. On the Change View “Output Types”” Overview screen Click on New Entries, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Output Type R J1IB

Description R Excise Bonding ARE

Click on the General Data tab.

Access sequence

R ZJ1B

Access to Condition

R Check the Check Box

Cannot be changed

O

Multiple Issuing R Check the Check Box

Partner – indep.Output

O

Do not write processing log

O

Program O

FORM routine O

Program O

FORM routine O

Click on Default Values Tab

Dispatch Time R Send Immediately (When saving the application)

User Entry

Transmission medium

R Print output User entry

Partner Function O

Communication Strategy

O

Click on Storage System

Storage Mode R Print only Print Only

Page 124 of 254

Page 125: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Document Type O

Click on Print Tab

Print Parameter R User parameters User Parameters

3. Click on the Mail Title and text Folder. On the Change View “Mail Title and Text” : Details screen enter as follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Application R ME

Output Type R J1IB

Language R EN

Title O User Entry

4. Click on the Processing Routines Folder. On the Change View “Processing Routines” : Details screen, enter as follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Output Type R J1IB

Application R ME

Transm.Medium R 1

Layout Module O

Smart Form O

On the Processing 1 Block enter as follows

Program R J_1IPRNTARE

FORM Routine R ENTRY_ARE1

Form R J_1I_ARE1

5. Click on the Partner Functions Folder. On the Change View “Partner Functions” : Overview enter as follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Application R ME

Output Type R J1IB

Medium R Print output

Function O

Name O

Standard SAP R/3 System will have predefined Output Type: J1IB for ARE – 1 Printing.

Page 125 of 254

Page 126: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Result Output Type for ARE-1 defined.

25.1.9 Specifying Printers

UseAssigning printers to the Output Type J1IB

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Exports Under Excise Regulations Printouts of ARE Documents Specify Printers

Transaction Code OMJ3

2. on the Change View “Print Parameters”” Overview screen Click on New Entries, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Condition Type R J1IB

Plant R BP01

Storage Location

R BSRB

Output Device R BL11 ( give appropriate Printer name )

Name O User Entry

Immediate O User Entry

Release O User Entry

Suffix 1 O User Entry

Suffix 2 O User Entry

Recipient O User Entry

Department O User Entry

SAP cover page O User Entry

Text O User Entry

Page 126 of 254

Page 127: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Authorization O User Entry

Print Immediately

O User Entry

Release after output

O User Entry

Result Printer assigned to Output Type J1IB.

25.2 Manual Activity

25.2.1 Importing Form in to the Client

UseForm J_1I_ARE1 has to be imported in to the present client.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/ 3 Menu SAP Easy Access Logisticcs Quality Management Quality Certificates Outgoing Certificate profile Process form

Transaction Code SE71

2. On the Change View “Access sequences “ : Overview screen Click on New Entries, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

AcSq Access sequence R ZJ1B

Description R ARE

Select this line and Click on Accesses Folder

3. On the Form Painter : Request screen enter as follows:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Form Form name R J_1I_ARE1

Language R EN Default

4. On the STnadard menu click on Utilities Copy from client. In the Copy Forms Between Clients screen enter as follows :

Page 127 of 254

Page 128: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Form Name R J_1I_ARE1

Source client R 000 Default

Target Form R J_1I_ARE1

Original language only

O

Flow Trace R Check the box Default

Click on the Execute Icon

Result

Form J_1I_ARE1 down loaded in to the present client.

25.3 Master Data

25.3.1 Maintaining Settings for J1IB

UseMaintain settings for Output type J1IB.

Procedure14. Run the following activity

IMG Menu

Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Output Determination Maintain Output Types

Transaction Code M706

15. Maintain settings for J1IB manually by executing the CATT: /SMB14/M706_C280_J91.

25.3.2 Maintaining Postal Address

UseMaintain Postal address to be entered in the ARE – Document.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

Page 128 of 254

Page 129: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Basic Settings Maintain Postal Addresses

Transaction Code SPRO

2. Maintain Rejection code manually with reference to variant file SMB14_SM30_C250_J91_01.TXT.

25.3.3 Maintaining Rejection Codes

UseMaintain Rejection code to be entered in the ARE – Document.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Incoming Excise Invoices Maintain Rejection Codes

Transaction Code SPRO

2. Maintain Rejection code manually with reference to variant file SMB14_SM30_C200_J91_01.TXT.

25.3.4 Creating Customer Master

UseCreate Customer Master.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu

SAP menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partner Customer Create Complete

Transaction Code XD01

2. Create Customer master manually with reference to variant file SMB14_XD01_C110_J88_J91_01.TXT.

Page 129 of 254

Page 130: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

25.3.5 Customer CIN details

UseCreate CIN details for the Customer Master.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu

User menu Indirect Taxes Master Data J1ID - Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Create CIN details for the Customer master manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C120_J88_J91_01.TXT.

25.3.6 Sales Views for Material master in New Sales Organization

UseMaterial which is created earlier has to be created in the new Sales Organization which is used in this Building block.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu

Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General) Immediately

Transaction Code MM01

2. Create Sales views for the Material in new Sales Organization manually with reference to variant file SMB14_MM01_C180_J91_01.TXT.

25.3.7 Pricing Conditions

UseCreate Pricing Conditions for the Material.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

Page 130 of 254

Page 131: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

SAP R/3 Menu

SAP menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data ConditionsSelect Using Condition TypeCreate

Transaction Code VK11

2. Create Pricing Conditions manually with reference to variant file SMB14_VK11_C140_J88_J91_01.TXT.

25.3.8 Tax Conditions

UseCreate Tax Conditions for calculating Excise duty and Sales Tax.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu

SAP menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data ConditionsSelect Using Condition TypeCreate

Transaction Code VK11

2. Create Tax Conditions manually with reference to variant file SMB14_VK11_C170_J91_01.TXT.

25.3.9 Condition record for Output

UseCreate Condition record for Output for printing the Billing document.

Procedure3. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu

SAP menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Output Billing Document Create

Transaction Code VV31

4. Create Condition record for Output manually with reference to variant file SMB14_VV31_C100_J04_J91_01.TXT.

Page 131 of 254

Page 132: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

ContentsJ92 - Stock Transfer between Plants..........................................................................................132

1 Purpose............................................................................................................................... 132

2 Preparation.......................................................................................................................... 132

2.1 Prerequisites..............................................................................................................132

3 Stock Transfer between Plants............................................................................................132

3.1 Master Data Setup for Stock Transport Order...........................................................132

3.1.1 Customer Master for BP01 and BP02...................................................................132

3.1.2 Vendor Master for BP01 and BP02.......................................................................133

3.1.3 Customer CIN Details............................................................................................133

3.1.4 Vendor CIN Details................................................................................................133

3.2 Stock Transferring between Plants............................................................................134

3.2.1 Setting up Stock Transport Order..........................................................................134

3.2.2 Outputting Condition Record for Stock Transport Order........................................137

3.2.3 Assigning Billing Types to Delivery Types.............................................................138

3.3 Master Data...............................................................................................................139

3.3.1 Creating Customer Master....................................................................................139

3.3.2 Sales Views for Material Master in New Plant.......................................................139

3.3.3 Pricing Conditions.................................................................................................139

3.3.4 Tax Conditions......................................................................................................140

3.3.5 Condition Record for Output..................................................................................140

Page 132 of 254

Page 133: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

J92 - Stock Transfer between Plants

26PurposeIn Indian business scenario most of the time there will be a manufacturing plant to take care of production activity and there will be depots to take care of distribution network of products produced. If material is subject to Excise Duty, even moving between plant and depot also needs to be with Excise Invoice. This process describes the full cycle of from stock transport order, goods issue, excise invoice, goods receipt process.

27Preparation

27.1 PrerequisitesJ02 – Organizational elements

J03 – Financial Accounting

J04 – Sales and Distribution

J05 – Materials Management

28Stock Transfer between Plants

28.1 Master Data Setup for Stock Transport Order

28.1.1 Customer Master for BP01 and BP02

UseEach Plant has to be created as Customer in another Plant (for example, BP01 as Customer in BP02 Plant and BP02 Plant as Customer in BP01 Plant).

Procedure5. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu SAP menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partner Customer Create Complete

Transaction Code XD01

6. Create Customer Master BP01 and BP02 manually with reference to variant file SMB14_XD01_C190_J92_01.TXT.

Page 133 of 254

Page 134: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

28.1.2 Vendor Master for BP01 and BP02

UseEach Plant has to be created as Vendor in another Plant (for example, BP01 as Vendor in BP02 Plant and BP02 Plant as Vendor in BP01 Plant).

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu SAP menu Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

Transaction Code XK01

2. Create Vendor Master BP01 and BP02 manually with reference to variant file SMB14_XK01_C220_J92_01.TXT.

28.1.3 Customer CIN Details

UseCIN details have to be maintained for above created Customers.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP CIN Role Menu User menu Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Maintain CIN details for the Customers manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C120_J88_J92_01.TXT.

28.1.4 Vendor CIN Details

UseCIN details have to be maintained for above created Vendors.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

Page 134 of 254

Page 135: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

SAP CIN Role Menu User menu Indirect Taxes Master Data Excise Rate Maintenance

Transaction Code J1ID

2. Maintain CIN details for the Vendors manually with reference to variant file SMB14_J1ID_C340_J81_J92_01.TXT.

28.2 Stock Transferring between Plants

28.2.1 Setting up Stock Transport Order

28.2.1.1 Defining Shipping Data for Plants

UseHere you maintain the customer code of the receiving plant. This customer number is used in SD shipping processing to identify the goods recipient (ship-to party) this provision has been made in Customizing for a stock transfer to be carried out with a SD.

Prerequisites Create customer master for BP01 Manufacturing Plant with customer code as

BP01PLANT.

Create customer master for BP02 Depot Plant with customer code as BP02DEPOT

Create vendor master for BP01 Manufacturing Plant with BP01PLANT and assign customer code BP02DEPOT in customer field of Control screen of vendor master.

Create vendor master for BP02 Depot Plant with BP02DEPOT and assign customer code BP01PLANT in customer field of Control screen of vendor master.

Transaction Code

Master Data

Code to be used

Account Group Note

XD01 Customer BP01PLANT 0009 – Sold-to party –IN

XD01 Customer BP02DEPOT 0009 – Sold-to party –IN

XK01 Vendor BP01PLANT LIEF – Vendor External number

XK01 Vendor BP02DEPOT LIEF – Vendor External number

Procedure

Page 135 of 254

Page 136: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

29. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Setup Stock Transport Order Define Shipping Data for Plants

Transaction Code SPRO

30. On the Change View “Stock Transport Order”: Over view screen, make the following entries:

31. Select BP01 Best Practices Mfg Plant and click on Details icon or Control+Shift+F2.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Customer no. – plant

Customer code of plant

R BP01PLANT

Sales organization

Sales organization R BP01

Distrib. Channel Distribution channel

R 01

Int.co.billing div. Inter company billing division

O 01

32. Press enter and save the entries by clicking Save icon or Control + S.

33. Now repeat the steps 2 to 5 for depot plant BP02.

34. On the Change View “Stock Transport Order”: Over view screen, make the following entries:

35. Select BP02 Best Practices Depot Plant and click on Details icon or Control+Shift+F2.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Customer no. – plant

Customer code of plant

R BP02DEPOT

Sales organization

Sales organization R BP01

Distrib. Channel Distribution channel

R 01

Int.co.billing div. Inter company billing division

O 01

36. Press enter and save the entries by clicking Save icon or Control + S.

Result Data is saved.

28.2.1.2 Assigning Delivery Type and Checking Rule

UseHere in this step, you specify whether an SD delivery is to be created in the case of a PO with a certain combination of supplying plant and document type. You can also specify which delivery type is to be used. The delivery type in Sales and Distribution (SD) determines how a delivery is

Page 136 of 254

Page 137: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

handled. In the standard system, the delivery type 'NL' is used for stock transfers without a billing document. The same standard setting is used for this process.

Prerequisites Create customer master for BP01 Manufacturing Plant with code BP01PLANT

Create customer master for BP02 Depot Plant BP02 with code BP02DEPOT

Create vendor master for BP01 Manufacturing Plant with BP01PLANT and assign customer code BP02DEPOT in customer field of Control screen of vendor master.

Create vendor master for BP02 Depot Plant with BP02DEPOT and assign customer code BP01PLANT in customer filed field of Control screen of vendor master.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Setup Stock Transport Order Assign Delivery Type and Checking Rule

Transaction Code SPRO

2. On the Change View “Stock Transfer Data”: Over view screen, Click on New Entries icon and make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Type Document Type for Stock Transport Order

O UB Input value

OTyp.descr Document type description

O Stock transport order No action required

SPlt Supplying Plant O BP01 Input value

Name1 Name of plant O Best Practices Mfg Plant No action required

DelTy Delivery type O NL Input value

Description Delivery type description

O Replenishment Dlv. No action required

ChR Checking rule O 01 Input value

Description of checking rule

Description of checking rule

O Checking rule 01 No action required

3. Press enter and save the entries by clicking Save icon or Control + S.

4. Now repeat the steps 2 to 4 for depot plant BP02.

5. On the Change View “Stock Transfer Data”: Over view screen, Click on New Entries icon and make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Type Document Type for Stock Transport Order

O UB Input value

Page 137 of 254

Page 138: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

OTyp.descr Document type description

O Stock transport order No action required

SPlt Supplying Plant O BP02 Input value

Name1 Name of plant O Best Practices Depot Plant

No action required

DelTy Delivery type O NL Input value

Description Delivery type description

O Replenishment Dlv. No action required

ChR Checking rule O 01 Input value

Description of checking rule

Description of checking rule

O Checking rule 01 No action required

6. Press enter and save the entries by clicking Save icon or Control + S.

Result Data is saved.

28.2.2 Outputting Condition Record for Stock Transport Order

UseIn this step you are going to create condition record for outputting the document.

Procedure 6. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 Menu Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Messages Purchase Order

Transaction Code MN04

7. On screen Create Output – Condition Records: Purchase Order you will get Output Type field, input the value NEU in the field and pres Enter.

8. After selecting, system will give a pop-up screen with three radio buttons; select Purchasing Output Determination: Document Type the third icon.

9. On the screen Create Condition Record (Purchase Order): Fast Entry, Make the following entries.

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Doc.Type Document Type R UB Input value

PartF Partner R DP Input value

Medium Print medium R 1 Input value

Date/time Date and time R 3 Input value

Page 138 of 254

Page 139: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Select this line item and

Click on Communication icon

Output Device Printer name R Give appropriate printer name

Input value

10. Press Enter key and save the entry by clicking on Save icon or press Control + S.

Result Condition records are saved.

28.2.3 Assigning Billing Types to Delivery Types

UseThe purpose of this activity is to define which Delivery Document type or Billing Document type can be referenced to create the Excise Invoice.

Procedure 1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu Logistics - General Tax on Goods Movements India Business Transactions Outgoing Excise Invoices Assign Billing Types to Delivery Types

Transaction Code SPRO

2. Click on New Entries, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Note

Dlv. Ty Delivery Type O NL

Bill.T Billing Type O JEX

Click on Save Icon

It is predefined in Standard SAP R/3 System.

Result Delivery Types and Billing types are defined for Excise Invoice type.

Page 139 of 254

Page 140: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

28.3 Master Data

28.3.1 Creating Customer Master

UseCreate Customer Master.

Procedure3. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu SAP menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partner Customer Create Complete

Transaction Code XD01

4. Create Customer master manually with reference to variant file SMB14_XD01_C110_J88_J92_01.TXT.

28.3.2 Sales Views for Material Master in New Plant

UsePreviously created Material has to be extended to the Plant BP02.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu SAP menu Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General) Immediately

Transaction Code MM01

2. Create Sales Views for Material in new Plant manually with reference to variant file SMB14_MM01_C130_J92_01.TXT.

28.3.3 Pricing Conditions

UseCreate Pricing Conditions for the Material.

Procedure3. Run the following activity

Page 140 of 254

Page 141: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

SAP R/3 Menu SAP menu L ogistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Conditions Select Using Condition Type Create

Transaction Code VK11

4. Create Pricing Conditions manually with reference to variant file SMB14_VK11_C140_J88_J92_01.TXT.

28.3.4 Tax Conditions

UseCreate Tax Conditions for calculating different Taxes.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu SAP menu L ogistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Conditions Select Using Condition Type Create

Transaction Code VK11

2. Create Tax Conditions manually with reference to variant file SMB14_VK11_C150_J88_J92_01.TXT.

28.3.5 Condition Record for Output

UseCreate Condition record for Output for printing the Billing document.

Procedure1. Run the following activity

SAP R/3 Menu SAP menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Output Billing Document Create

Transaction Code VV31

2. Create Condition record for Output manually with reference to variant file SMB14_VV31_C100_J04_J92_01.TXT.

Page 141 of 254

Page 142: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

ContentsJ94 - Excise Periodic Processing................................................................................................142

Prerequisites........................................................................................................................ 142

1 Excise Periodic Transactions...............................................................................................142

1.1 TR6 Challan Posting with PLA Register Updation.........................................................142

1.2 Utilization of CENVAT...................................................................................................145

2 Excise Report....................................................................................................................... 149

2.1 CENVAT Register..........................................................................................................149

3 Excise Register Updation.....................................................................................................151

3.1 Updation of RG1 Register.............................................................................................151

3.2 RG1 Register Extraction................................................................................................154

3.3 RG1 Register Print Utility...............................................................................................155

3.2 PLA Register Extraction.................................................................................................156

3.3 PLA Register Print Utility................................................................................................158

3.3 Register RT- 12..............................................................................................................159

Page 142 of 254

Page 143: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

29J94 - Excise Periodic Processing

29.1.1.1 PurposeExcise Periodic Processing’s that are to be carried out at end of a period. Excise Periodic Processing helps you prepare and carry out the activities required for day-end or month-end and year-end closing.

TR6 Challan Posting with PLA Register Updation

Utilization of CENVAT

RG1 Register updation

Proforma for Monthly Return under Rule 7 of the Cenvat Credit Rules, 2001

29.1.2 Prerequisites

Before execute business scenarios, you need to post the business processes transactions from other scenarios.

As part of the integrated scenario, this scenario needs several BPPs as prerequisites to demonstrate, these include:

J64 – Production Planning and Discrete Manufacturing

J81 –Procurement of Stock Materials

J88 – Sales from Manufacturing Unit & Returns

29.2 1 Excise Periodic Transactions

29.2.1 1.1 TR6 Challan Posting with PLA Register Updation

29.2.1.1 UseYou follow this procedure to make a posting when you transfer money to your personal ledger account (PLA) and to update the PLA Register. When you post Financial Accounting Document system shall not update the PLA Register. Hence while posting Financial Accounting post PLA to a clearing account i.e. PLA on Hold account. When you update the TR6 Challan updation process system will update the PLA Register and PLA account and reverse the PLA on Hold Account.

29.2.1.2 PrerequisitesYou have made the posting for transfer of PLA in the Financial Accounting document.

Post the Financial Accounting Document note the document number which generated by system in the following transaction:

Page 143 of 254

Page 144: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Transaction Code : FB50

Company Code : BP01

Document Number : 1000000##(Internally generated number)

Posting Date : Current Date

Fiscal year : Current Fiscal Year

Currency : INR

GL- 24920000 PLA On Hold Debit INR 1,000,000.00

GL-24510000 Chq hnd/Rem Credit INR 1,000,000.00

29.2.1.3 Procedure

Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Country India User menu Indirect Taxes Excise JV Create

Transaction code J1IH

On the Excise JV – Main Menu, select the TR6 Challan Push Button

On the Create Excise JV – Initial Screen (TR6 Challan Posting) screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Comment

Document Number

Document number R Input the document number you just noted.

1000000**

Enter the Accounting Document number of TR6 Challan number or

TR6 Challan reference number

the number is the accounting document number posted for making the outgoing payment i.e TR6Challan

Document Year

Document year R 2003

Fiscal Year

Company Code

Company Code R BP01

Plant Plant R BP01 For which plant PLA paid

Excise Group Excise Group R 10 Plant Excise Group

Sub-transaction Type

Sub-Transaction Type O

Select the Enter icon to proceed

Page 144 of 254

Page 145: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

On the Details ‘Create Excise JV – Details for TR6 Challan <Document Number, Document Year> Posting’:

5.1 Header fields

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Comment

TR6Challan Number

Document Number R Defaulted from the previous step

Grayed out and system defaulted the value

Company Code

Company Code R Defaulted from the previous step

Grayed out and system defaulted the value

Plant Plant R Defaulted from the previous step

Grayed out and system defaulted the value

Document Date

Document Date R System Date Grayed out and system defaulted the value

Posting Date Posting Date R System Date If required user can change the posting date

Business Area

Business Area C If Business Area is active, then only we need to enter the Business Area

5. 2 TR6Challan Posting Accounts

Credit / Debit

G/ L Account Amount Description Comment

C - Credit 0024920000 1000000 PLA On Hold Input the Credit Amount, which paid through TR6 Challan

D – Debit 0024890000 0 PLA AED Input the PLA AED Amount as per TR6 Challan

D – Debit 0024880000 1000000 PLA BED Input the PLA BED Amount as per TR6 Challan

D – Debit 0024910000 0 PLA Cess Input the PLA Cess Amount as per TR6 Challan

D – Debit 0024900000 0 PLA SED Input the PLA SED Amount as per TR6 Challan

System will check the total of debit amount must equal to the total of credit amount. Input the values manually based on the TR6 Challan.

Page 145 of 254

Page 146: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Post the Excise Document. Excise JV Save. Alternatively: Ctrl + S

29.2.1.4 Result

Excise JV <JV Document Number>.acctng. No. <Accounting Document Number> with Part2 Sl. <Part Serial Number > has been successfully created

Message no. 8I212

29.2.1.5 Example

Excise JV 0000000106 acctng. No. 100000027 with Part2 Sl. 0000010006 has been successfully created

In the above example assumed that, only PLA BED is being paid through TR6 Challan. Based on actual payment corresponding values can be entered.

29.2.2 1.2 Utilization of CENVAT

29.2.2.1 UseUtilization of CENVAT scenario is used to calculate how much excise duty you must remit to the authorities. Legislation requires you to remit excise duty monthly. Companies are allowed five days to remit the excise duty, except for the month of March.

Once the report has determined how much you have to pay, it allows you to specify where the money should be paid from – whether it should be deducted from the CENVAT credits that you have accumulated in RG23A Register or RG23C Register, or whether it should be deducted from the personal ledger account (PLA). You have an option to select the appropriation amounts as required.

29.2.2.2 PrerequisitesUser must be assigned the Country India specific menu.

Excise Invoices must be posted in the system to arrive the CENVAT Payable for deliveries made from the factory. The CENVAT payable amount shall be captured to a clearing account as a liability i.e. Credit At the time of utilization of CENVAT system will post the Debit entry to the same account based on the account assignments in the Customization.

29.2.2.3 Procedure

1. Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Country India User Menu Indirect Taxes Sales / Outbound Movements Fortnightly Payment

Transaction code J2IU

2. On the Fortnight Utilization of CENVAT screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Comment

Company Code

Company code for posting of Excise

R BP01

Page 146 of 254

Page 147: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Plant Facility where goods or services are produced or sold.

R BP01 Plant

Excise Group Excise Group R 10 Based on Excise Group, Excise Records will be updated

Business Area

Business Area O Based usage of Business area need to be entered

Fortnight Payment Posting Date

Posting date for Posting of Utilization document and updation of Excise Registers

O Date on which posting has to be made

If no values entered, by default system date will be considered as Posting date for posting of utilization document

Excise Invoice Selection

Period Date range for which Excise Invoices are posted and excise utilization need to be carried out

R Date Range Enter the date range for which utilization is to be posted.

Example if utilization for the month of January 2004, enter the from date as 01.01.2004 and To date as 31.01.2004

Excise Invoice

Excise Invoice numbers for which utilization need to be carried out

O If the selection need to be restricted for some invoices this option has to be used otherwise system will select all the invoice in the given period

Additional Options

Simulate Simulate postings in display

O Simulate option can be used to display the total Excise payment

Page 147 of 254

Page 148: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

which needs to be done at the end of the period

Restrict Pending Invoices

Restriction on Invoice Selection

O System will restrict the invoices selection based on the entry made in the Excise Invoice numbers entry

Pay AED from BED

Utilization of AED payable from BED balance

O Based on requirement select the check box, if the AED to be utilized from BED

Pay SED from BED

Utilization of SED payable from BED balance

O Based on requirement select the check box, if SED to be utilized from BED

Display last Utilization date

Displays date of CENVAT was last utilized

O To see the upto the date for which CENVAT utilized

Display pending Invoices

Displays the pending invoices based on the selections criteria

O To see the pending invoices list this option can be used

3. Click on execute icon or Press F8 or Program Execute

4. On the Details ‘SAP’ screen, make the following entries:

Field name R/O/C

User action and values

Comment

BED SED AED CESS

Available Balances

RG23A Display the amount available for utilization

RG23C Display the amount available for utilization

PLA Display the

Page 148 of 254

Page 149: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

amount available for utilization

GL Account Balances

RG23A Display the amount available in GL account

RG23C Display the amount available in GL account

PLA Display the amount available in GL account

Amounts Payable

Total Display the amount payable for the selected period or Invoices

Balance Utilization

RG23A Amount Amount Amount Amount C Input the Amount based on the payable under BED, AED, SED and Cess

The input value can not exceed the amount available for utilization

RG23C Amount Amount Amount Amount C Input the Amount based on the payable under BED, AED, SED and Cess

The input value can not exceed the amount available for utilization

PLA Amount Amount Amount Amount C Input the Amount based on the payable under BED, AED, SED and Cess

The input value can not exceed the amount available for utilization

Balance utilization must be equal to the Amount payable.

After inputting the values use the simulate option. Then system displays the necessary message whether document can be posted, or displays the difference amount needs to be adjusted against RG23A, RG23C or PLA Balance Utilization.

Page 149 of 254

Page 150: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

5. The CENVAT Utilization may be posted by clicking on the Save button or Press - CTR+S

29.2.2.4 Result Part 2 posted and accounting document <Accounting Document Number> generated

29.2.2.5 Example Part 2 posted and accounting document 100000038 generated

29.3 2 Excise Report

29.3.1 2.1 CENVAT Register

29.3.1.1 UseDetails to submit an Annexure to the Excise Authorities as a Monthly Return Under Rule 57AE of the Central Excise Rules, 2001. CENVAT Register displays input credit details for Raw materials or Capital Goods. This report can be generated detailed as Annexure or summary as Abstract.

29.3.1.2 PrerequisitesUser must be assigned the Indian Localization menu.

29.3.1.3 Procedure

1. Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Country India User Menu Indirect Taxes Registers Excise Tax CENVAT Register

Transaction code J2I9

2. On the Proforma for Monthly Return Under Rule 57AE of the Central Excise Rule screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Comment

Company Code

Company code R BP01

Excise Group Excise Group for which ID for which CENVAT Register is being generated

R 10

Posting Date Posting date range R The date from the beginning of the month to end of the month

Annexure Output to be generated Annexure or Abstract

C Select this radio button if the out put is being generated for Annexure

At time you can generate an Annexure or Abstract

Page 150 of 254

Page 151: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Abstract Output to be generated Annexure or Abstract

C Select this radio button if the out put is being generated for Abstract

At time you can generate an Annexure or Abstract

Inputs Annexure to be generated for Input materials or Capital Goods

C Select this radio button if the out put Annexure is being generated for Input Materials

At time you can generate an Annexure for Input materials or Capital Goods

Capital Goods

Annexure to be generated for Input materials or Capital Goods

C Select this radio button if the out put Annexure is being generated for Capital Goods

At time you can generate an Annexure for Input materials or Capital Goods

3. The out put can be saved into a local file or printed by using the print options.

29.3.1.4 Result You are able to generate Proforma for Monthly Return Under Rule 57AE of the Central Excise Rule.

Page 151 of 254

Page 152: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

29.4 3 Excise Register Updation

29.4.1 3.1 Updation of RG1 Register

29.4.1.1 UseRG1 register maintained at Manufacturing Plants for excisable finished goods. The register shows goods movements from the factory to a store and stores to customer, specifically for excisable finished goods. The R/3 System generates all the necessary entries in the register.

This report only creates register entries for goods movements that have not already been entered. It does not create duplicate entries.

Using this activity, you can also update the goods issue into RG23A Part I and RG23C Part I, Register by select the radio button option in the Registers.

29.4.1.2 PrerequisitesTo extract the data to RG1 Register, Material numbers has to be maintained in the table J_2IRG1BAL - Opening/Closing balance table for RG1.

29.4.1.3 Procedure

1. Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Country India User Menu Indirect Taxes Registers Excise Tax Update RG23A/C Issues and RG1

Transaction code J1I5

2. On the Update of Registers RG1 and RG23(Part1) screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values

Comment

Company Code

Company Code R BP01

Plant Plant – for which RG1 Register is being maintained

R BP01

Excise Group Excise Group for which RG1 register is being maintained

R 10

Material Document Number

Material document number

O Based on the updation criteria enter values

Document Year

Material document year

O Material document year

Posting Date Date of Material document Posted

R Enter the Material Document

Page 152 of 254

Page 153: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Posting Date

Movement Type

Movement Type used for posting the materials

O

Storage Location

Storage location used for posting the material movements

O

Material Material number to update the RG1 Register

O

Document Date

Document date of the material document

O

Batch Batch number of the materials

O

Stock Type Stock Type declared O

Rule Excise Classification Rule

O

Classification Pre-defined Classifications

R IIM

For updation of goods receipts from Manufacturing plant use RMA

For updation of Goods issue, i.e. Removal from factory on payment of duty for home use – IDH

ReceiptsRMA- Receipt from manufacture

ROP-Receipt from outside under any other provision

Issues

IDH-Removal from factory on payment of duty for Home use

IDE-Removal on payment of duty for export under no bond

IWE-Removal without payment of duty for export under bond

IWT-Removal without payment of duty for transfers

IWO-Removal without payment of duty for other purpose

Page 153 of 254

Page 154: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

RG23/ RG1 RG23 / RG1 updation date

R Select the appropriate radio button to update the RG1 Register. Please select the document entry date radio button

Date to be considered by the system for updation of RG1 Register

Document Entry date

Document posting date

System date

Registers Register to update R Select the RG23A radio button to update the RG1 Register,

By using this Transaction you can update the following Registers

RG23A Part1

RG23C Pat1

RG1

Please press enter and ignore any messages.

Update the Receipts to RG1 Register and then update the issue to RG1 Registers. Follow the sequence of transactions.

You can update the RG1 Register by selecting material document header values or Material document line item level details or both together.

The following Classification codes need to be used while updating the Excise Registers:

Register Type Goods issues Goods receipts

RG 23A IIM ROP

IPD

IWD

RG23C IIM ROP

IPD

IWD

RG1 IDH RMA

IDE ROP

IWE

IWT

IWO

3. System will display the ‘Update of Registers RG1 and RG23 (Part1’) screen:

Displays all the line items to meet the selection criteria to update the RG1 Register.

Page 154 of 254

Page 155: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

4. Select the line items which needs to be updated to RG1 Register by selecting the check box at the beginning of the each line item

5. Simulate the selection by using the Simulate function or use Shift+F10 to simulate the selection

6. System will display the selection Green or Red Traffic lights. The line items which can be updated will be displayed with Green Traffic Lights and the line items which can not be updated will be displayed with Red Traffic Lights.

7. After selecting the right documents select the line item and use the Create button to update the RG1 Register or use CTRL+Shit+F11 to make register entry.

29.4.1.4 Result

Processing over for <number of records selected> records

29.4.2 3.2 RG1 Register Extraction

29.4.2.1 UseThis step need to be performed in order to create the RG1 details into the respective tables .

29.4.2.2 PrerequisitesYou have to complete the update of RG1 Register before performing this step.

29.4.2.3 Procedure

1. Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Country India User Menu Indirect Taxes Registers Excise Tax Extract

Transaction code J2I5

2. On the Excise Registers Extraction screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Comment

Excise Group Excise group for which RG1 Register being generated

R 10

State Date Starting date of Extraction

R Starting date of data to be extracted for RG1 registers

End Date Ending date of Extraction

R Ending date of data to be extracted for RG1 registers

Selection Registers

Mass extraction of data to all registers

R Select the radio button Select Any Register option

User can generate all the registers together or individual

Page 155 of 254

Page 156: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

register wise

Select individual Registers

Selection of individual register

R Activate the RG1 Check box to extract the RG1 Register

Display Last Extracted dates

Displays the previously upto what date the register has been extracted for information

O

3. Click on execute icon or Press F8 or Program Execute

4. If the RG1 Register is being generated for the Period First Time, system will execute the report and display the pop-screen with Register name and Green Tick mark, if it is successfully extracted, otherwise it will show the Red Cross.

29.4.2.4 Result

RG1 data has been extracted

Using this activity, you can also extract the following Excise Registers in addition to RG1.

RG23A Part I

RG23A Part II

RG23C Part I

RG23C Part II

PLA

RG23D

In the Registers select option, if you select All registers, the system will create an extract for all registers. If you only want to create an extract for specific registers, select Select any register and then the registers that you want to extract.

29.4.3 3.3 RG1 Register Print Utility

29.4.3.1 UseThe objective of this process is to print the RG1 Register or to display on the screen.

29.4.3.2 PrerequisitesThe data must be extracted to the RG1 Register for the period to which RG1 Register need to be printed.

Page 156 of 254

Page 157: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

29.4.3.3 Procedure

1. Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Country India User Menu Indirect Taxes Registers Excise Tax Print Utility program

Transaction code J2I6

2. On the Print Excise Registers screen, select the RG1 Radio button to print the RG1 Register.

3. Click on Execute icon or Press F8 or Program Execute

4. On the Print RG1 Register screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Comment

Excise Group Excise group for which RG1 Register is being generated

R 10 Enter the Excise Group

Start Date Starting date of the period for which currently RG1Register is being generated

R For example

01.02.2004

Starting Date

End Date Ending date of the period for which currently RG1Register is being generated

R For example:

29.02.2004

Ending Date

5. Click on Execute icon or Press F8 or Program Execute

6. System will display the Print parameters maintenance screen assign the out put device name and select the Print Preview option. System will display the output on the screen.

7. See the output on the screen and based on the requirement print the output using Ctrl + P option or through menu Text Print.

29.4.3.4 Result

RG1 Register ready to print or you can see on the screen.

Using this activity, you can also view or print the following Excise Registers in addition to RG1

RG23A Part I

RG23A Part II

RG23C Part I

RG23C Part II

PLA

RG23D

You have to print or see the registers one after another.

Page 157 of 254

Page 158: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

29.4.4 3.2 PLA Register Extraction

29.4.4.1 UseThis step need to be performed in order to extract the data relating to PLA Register to respective tables.

29.4.4.2 PrerequisitesThe following process has been executed, if any transactions took place during the period of PLA register extraction for payment of CENVAT and Sale of goods

TR6 Challan updation

Utilization of CENVAT

29.4.4.3 Procedure

1. Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Country India User Menu Indirect Taxes Registers Excise Tax Extract

Transaction code J2I5

2. On the Excise Registers Extraction screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Comment

Excise Group Excise group for which PLA Register being generated

R 10

State Date Starting date of Extraction

R Starting date of data to be extracted for PLA registers

End Date Ending date of Extraction

R Ending date of data to be extracted for PLA registers

Selection Registers

Mass extraction of data to all registers

R Select the radio button Select Any Register option

User can generate all the registers together or individual register wise

Select individual Registers

Selection of individual register

R Activate the PLA Check box to extract the PLA Register

Display Last Extracted dates

Displays the previously upto what date the register has been extracted for information

O System will display the last extraction date on the screen

3. Click on execute icon or Press F8 or Program Execute

Page 158 of 254

Page 159: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

4. If the PLA Register is being extract for the Period First Time, system will execute the report and display the pop-screen with Register name and Green Tick mark, if it is successfully extracted, otherwise it will show the Red Cross.

29.4.4.4 Result

PLA data has been extracted

29.4.5 3.3 PLA Register Print Utility

29.4.5.1 UseThe objective of this process is to print the PLA Register or to display on the screen.

29.4.5.2 PrerequisitesThe data must be extracted to the PLA Register for the period to which PLA Register need to be printed.

29.4.5.3 Procedure

1. Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Country India User Menu Indirect Taxes Registers Excise Tax Print Utility program

Transaction code J2I6

2. On the Print Excise Registers screen, select the PLA Radio button to print the PLA Register.

3. Click on Execute icon or Press F8 or Program Execute

4. On the Print PLA Register screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Comment

Excise Group Excise group for which PLA Register is being generated

R 10 Enter the Excise Group

Start Date Starting date of the period for which currently PLA Register is being generated

R For example

01.02.2004

Starting Date

End Date Ending date of the period for which currently PLA Register is being generated

R For example

29.02.2004

Ending Date

5. Click on Execute icon or Press F8 or Program Execute

6. System will display the Print parameters maintenance screen assign the out put device name and select the Print Preview option. System will display the output on the screen.

7. See the output on the screen and based on the requirement print the output using Ctrl + P option or through menu Text Print.

Page 159 of 254

Page 160: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

29.4.5.4 Result

PLA register displayed on screen or printed.

29.4.6 3.3 Register RT- 12

29.4.6.1 Use

This is activity is used to generate the RT-12, to submit on monthly basis. The report summarizes the CENVAT and PLA information from the other registers.

29.4.6.2 PrerequisitesThe following has been executed:

Utilization of CENVAT

Data Extract to RG23A Part II Register

Data Extract to RG23C Part II Register

Data Extract to PLA Register

29.4.6.3 Procedure

1. Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options:

SAP R/3 menu Country India User Menu Indirect Taxes Registers Excise Tax Print Utility program

Transaction code J2I6 or J2IN

2. On the Print Excise Registers screen, select the RT-12 Radio button to print the RT-12 Register.

3. Click on Execute icon or Press F8 or Program Execute

4. On the RT-12 New Format screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description R/O/C User action and values Comment

Excise Group Excise group for which RT12 Register is being generated

R 10 Enter the Excise Group

Start Date Starting date of the period for which currently R12Register is being generated

R For example

01.02.2004

Starting Date

End Date Ending date of the period for which currently RT12 Register is being generated

R For example

29.02.2004

Ending Date

From the Details, select one of the radio button

Page 160 of 254

Page 161: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Display headings

Fortnight – Removals & duty payment (this option, executed only on Fortnightly basis in the system)

Month- Excisable Goods manufactured

Month – Goods cleared without payment of Duty

Month – Total duty and interest paid

Based on the selection system will display the corresponding detail.

5. Click on Execute icon or Press F8 or Program Execute

6. System will display the Print parameters maintenance screen assign the out put device name and select the Print Preview option. System will display the output on the screen.

7. See the output on the screen and based on the requirement print the output using Ctrl + P option or through menu Text Print or Print Preview

29.4.6.4 Result RT-12 register displayed on screen or printed.

Page 161 of 254

Page 162: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

EWT ON CUSTOMER CONFIG DOCUMENT

Requirement:

While issuing the credit note to the Customer, the amount is liable to pay the Tax deducted at source under Income Tax rule. At present, the credit notes are raised through the Transaction Code FB75. While doing this transaction, TDS to be deducted and paid in the next month payment to the income tax department.

Task:

Field Status variant for the Customer Master to be opened for EWT tax code and tax type for master data updation.

Field status variant for posting key to be opened for EWT accounting entry. New Tax type and Tax code to be created Newly created tax code to be assigned to G/L Accounts Newly created tax code to be attached to the Company code. Master Data Maintenance Customer

Page 162 of 254

Page 163: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

0.1 FIELD STATUS VARIENT: (SPRO)

IMG PATH: Financial Accounting … Accounts receivable / payable …Customer Accounts … Master Records … Preparation for creating customer master records … define account groups with screen layout customers.

Page 163 of 254

Page 164: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 164 of 254

Page 165: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 165 of 254

Page 166: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

FOR ZI02:

Page 166 of 254

Page 167: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 167 of 254

Page 168: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 168 of 254

Page 169: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 169 of 254

Page 170: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

IMG PATH: Financial Accounting … Accounts receivable / payable …Customer Accounts … Master Records … Preparation for creating customer master records … define layout per company code customers.

IMG PATH: Financial Accounting … Accounts receivable / payable …Customer Accounts … Master Records … Preparation for creating customer master records … define layout per activity customers.

Page 170 of 254

Page 171: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 171 of 254

Page 172: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 172 of 254

Page 173: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 173 of 254

Page 174: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 174 of 254

Page 175: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

0.2 Posting key 11 field status variant change (OB41):

IMG PATH: Financial Accounting … Financial accounting global setting … Document … Line item … Controls … Define posting keys.

Page 175 of 254

Page 176: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 176 of 254

Page 177: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

0.3 New Tax Type and Tax code:

IMG PATH: Financial Accounting … Financial accounting global setting … With Holding Tax …Extended with Holding tax…Calculation…With holding tax type…Define with holding tax type for invoice posting

Page 177 of 254

Page 178: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 178 of 254

Page 179: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

IMG PATH: Financial Accounting … Financial accounting global setting … With Holding Tax …Extended with Holding tax…Calculation…With holding tax type…Define with holding tax type for Payment posting.

Page 179 of 254

Page 180: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 180 of 254

Page 181: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

IMG PATH: Financial Accounting … Financial accounting global setting … With Holding Tax …Extended with Holding tax…Calculation…With holding tax codes…Define with holding tax codes.

Page 181 of 254

Page 182: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 182 of 254

Page 183: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

0.4 EWT tax type attached to the Company code:

IMG PATH: Financial Accounting … Financial accounting global setting … With Holding Tax …Extended with Holding tax…company code … Assign with holding tax types to company code

Page 183 of 254

Page 184: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 184 of 254

Page 185: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

0.5 Tax code attached to the G/L account:

IMG PATH: Financial Accounting … Financial accounting global setting … With Holding Tax …Extended with Holding tax…postings … Accounts for with holding Tax … Define accounts for with holding Tax to be paid over

Page 185 of 254

Page 186: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

0.6 Master data maintenance – customer (XD02)

Page 186 of 254

Page 187: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

TRANSACTION FLOW:

TCODE: FB75: Customer Credit memo creation

Note while doing the credit note creation, please check whether the customer master data is maintained for With holding tax type and code in the company code level.

Page 187 of 254

Page 188: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Also please give the Section code. By debiting the expenses account, simulate.

By simulating, the following accounting entry will be shown. Check the accounting entry is right and save if it is correct. Note it down the accounting document no for challan updation.

CUSTOMER CHALLAN UPDATION (J1INCHLC)

It is different from the Vendor challan updation. To see the tcode in the menu path, Type tcode j1iln. Select Direct Tax, Extended with holding Tax, Customer challan

Page 188 of 254

Page 189: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

By selecting Execute, the clearing screen will appear. Select the line item, goto over view

Page 189 of 254

Page 190: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 190 of 254

Page 191: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Change the amount

Page 191 of 254

Page 192: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

and goto the menu document , simulate

Page 192 of 254

Page 193: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

post it and note it down the document no for bank challan updation.

Page 193 of 254

Page 194: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

UPDATE BANK CHALLAN: (J1INBANK)

Page 194 of 254

Page 195: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

and execute. The bank challan no will be updated.

Page 195 of 254

Page 196: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 196 of 254

Page 197: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Certificate printing: (J1INCC)

EXECUTE IT. BY GIVING THE PRINTER ID,

Page 197 of 254

Page 198: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

The certificate will be printed.

Page 198 of 254

Page 199: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 199 of 254

Page 200: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 200 of 254

Page 201: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Page 201 of 254

Page 202: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

30FAQ

30.1 General

o How do I know whether CIN is installed?

Run the function module test j_1bsa_component_check with component as ‘IN’ and you Run the function module test j_1bsa_component_check with component as ‘IN’ and you should get a return code ‘0’ and no exceptions. Before you can check this you should should get a return code ‘0’ and no exceptions. Before you can check this you should have applied SAP note 411079. have applied SAP note 411079.

o How do I invoke CIN transactions?

Best way to invoke CIN transactions is to attach the pre delivered CIN roles to user profiles. Best way to invoke CIN transactions is to attach the pre delivered CIN roles to user profiles.

o What are the roles available in CIN?

Please see the section below of the knowledge bank. Alternatively in an R3 system with CIN you can Please see the section below of the knowledge bank. Alternatively in an R3 system with CIN you can use the transaction PFCG (Profile Generator) and look for entries SAP_CIN*use the transaction PFCG (Profile Generator) and look for entries SAP_CIN*

o Where can I get the CIN user manual?

CIN user manual is now available as a CD and can be installed centrally and accessed by any user. It is CIN user manual is now available as a CD and can be installed centrally and accessed by any user. It is also available in SAP’s help portal at help.sap.com/additional components/ Country version India also available in SAP’s help portal at help.sap.com/additional components/ Country version India

o What will the country install program do?

The country install program (invoked using O035 transaction code) does pre customization of company The country install program (invoked using O035 transaction code) does pre customization of company code ‘0001’ so that you have some customization to start with which you can build further. code ‘0001’ so that you have some customization to start with which you can build further.

o Is there any pre customization available for CIN?

There is some customization available for CIN as a part of country install andThere is some customization available for CIN as a part of country install and other components are mentioned in the knowledge bank. There is no preother components are mentioned in the knowledge bank. There is no pre configured client for CIN. configured client for CIN.

o Must I always run country install after an upgrade?

You should run Country install program only if it is a fresh installation with no customization. If you You should run Country install program only if it is a fresh installation with no customization. If you have already started building the org structure and other process mapping then you must not run have already started building the org structure and other process mapping then you must not run country install program. country install program.

o Is there an area menu for CIN?

From R3 46B the concept of area menus are not much used in SAP. So it is preferable to use roles for From R3 46B the concept of area menus are not much used in SAP. So it is preferable to use roles for accessing the CIN transactions. You can also use the area menu J1ILN if you need.( Older accessing the CIN transactions. You can also use the area menu J1ILN if you need.( Older versions of CIN had area menu J1IL) versions of CIN had area menu J1IL)

o Where can I get all the transaction codes for CIN?

There is no need to know all the transaction codes with in CIN. What is moreThere is no need to know all the transaction codes with in CIN. What is more important is to look at the CIN roles and how this can be used. important is to look at the CIN roles and how this can be used.

o How do I know all the authorizations given with CIN?

Using Profile generator you can generate a authorization profiels for a givenUsing Profile generator you can generate a authorization profiels for a given role. You can use existing roles or build new roles also based on individualrole. You can use existing roles or build new roles also based on individual requirements. requirements.

o How do I upload the CIN related legacy data at the time of initial upload?

There is no standard tool or methodology for uploading CIN master orThere is no standard tool or methodology for uploading CIN master or transaction data at the moment. transaction data at the moment.

o What support does CIN provide for budget?

CIN product is designed in such away that changes can be done very easily. CIN product is designed in such away that changes can be done very easily.

o What do I do if the rates change after a budget?

Page 202 of 254

Page 203: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Excise rates are maintained as master data in CIN. You just need to put in newExcise rates are maintained as master data in CIN. You just need to put in new rates in CIN master data to change it with the new validity. But if sales tax ratesrates in CIN master data to change it with the new validity. But if sales tax rates are being changed then you cannot change the tax codes. You should define neware being changed then you cannot change the tax codes. You should define new tax codes with new rates and use them. Changes to income tax rates have to betax codes with new rates and use them. Changes to income tax rates have to be handled by defining new withholding tax codes. handled by defining new withholding tax codes.

o What do I do if the CENVAT process changes?

CIN team follows the budget related changes and releases correction notes ifCIN team follows the budget related changes and releases correction notes if there are changes to any of the CIN transactions or reports. You need to checkthere are changes to any of the CIN transactions or reports. You need to check SAPNET and apply the notes after the budget. SAPNET and apply the notes after the budget.

o Where do I get CIN release notes? o How to access the CIN release notes in the system?o What can I do if I need to submit few new reports?

Check SAPNET whether there are notes existing already. You can post a messageCheck SAPNET whether there are notes existing already. You can post a message to SAP support, who can tell ou whether some thing would be made available into SAP support, who can tell ou whether some thing would be made available in the short term. SAP support can also be contacted using the emailthe short term. SAP support can also be contacted using the email [email protected]@sap.com

o How do I know whether a new lgal requirement is being considered for development by SAP?

You can do a search on SAPNET front end or contact You can do a search on SAPNET front end or contact [email protected]@sap.com

30.2 CIN Basis

o Can I have CIN as well as other Add-ons in one box?

You can have multiple add-ons technically in one box from 46C on wards. ButYou can have multiple add-ons technically in one box from 46C on wards. But before doing this you need to contact SAP support who can guide for thebefore doing this you need to contact SAP support who can guide for the necessary precautions. necessary precautions.

o Is it possible for me to have multiple country versions in one client? Are there any installations with multiple country versions in one client?There are installations with multiple country versions in one client. From 46CThere are installations with multiple country versions in one client. From 46C onwards CIN is technically conflict free and can exist with other country versions.onwards CIN is technically conflict free and can exist with other country versions. However the installation process of multiple add-ons is not stright forward andHowever the installation process of multiple add-ons is not stright forward and you must contact pre sales before taking up a similar project. you must contact pre sales before taking up a similar project.

o How do I know which support pack I should move onto?

It is always beneficial to move to the latest support pack which is supported by CIN. This will It is always beneficial to move to the latest support pack which is supported by CIN. This will ensure that all the known errors until that point is solved. For knowing which is the approved levelensure that all the known errors until that point is solved. For knowing which is the approved level for India please look into note 81456. This note gets updated whenever there is a new add-on for India please look into note 81456. This note gets updated whenever there is a new add-on patch for CIN. You can look at the existing support packs at the service marketplace. patch for CIN. You can look at the existing support packs at the service marketplace.

o After importing support packs will the functionality change?

Support packs are collections of notes and should not change the basicSupport packs are collections of notes and should not change the basic functionality. They are mainly bug fixes. The support pack gives a list of notes forfunctionality. They are mainly bug fixes. The support pack gives a list of notes for which the corrections are included. which the corrections are included.

o Do I need to do an integration test after CIN support pack import?

Page 203 of 254

Page 204: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Some testing is required for the critical processes after a support packSome testing is required for the critical processes after a support pack implementation. It would also be a good practice to keep some CATTs to be doneimplementation. It would also be a good practice to keep some CATTs to be done after every SP import. after every SP import.

o What is a CRT?

CRT stands for Conlfict Resolution transport. Some add-ons change the core R3CRT stands for Conlfict Resolution transport. Some add-ons change the core R3 code. So when R3 comes up with Support packages there can be situations whencode. So when R3 comes up with Support packages there can be situations when the add-on modified code gets over written. In such scenarios the add-on willthe add-on modified code gets over written. In such scenarios the add-on will have to provide a Conflict resolution transport after merging the new R3 sourcehave to provide a Conflict resolution transport after merging the new R3 source with add-on corrections. As a customer what needs to be kept in mind is that ifwith add-on corrections. As a customer what needs to be kept in mind is that if there is a CRT for a SP then both needs to be applied together. This is handled bythere is a CRT for a SP then both needs to be applied together. This is handled by the SAP Patch manager tool SPAM. the SAP Patch manager tool SPAM.

o Will I get a CRT in CIN40A?

CIN40A does not carry any modifications to R3 core. So you will not get anyCIN40A does not carry any modifications to R3 core. So you will not get any CRT’s in CIN40A. However you will get Add-on patches in CIN40A which areCRT’s in CIN40A. However you will get Add-on patches in CIN40A which are collections of CIN notes bundled together. They need so specific Support packcollections of CIN notes bundled together. They need so specific Support pack level of R3 for technical reasons. level of R3 for technical reasons.

o Can I run Internet sales with excise taxes?

You need to have separate pricing procedure to make this possible. It would beYou need to have separate pricing procedure to make this possible. It would be best to contact SAP product management group on this. best to contact SAP product management group on this.

o When I upgrade will I lose my customization?

Upgrades will put the new customization only to client 000. No customization isUpgrades will put the new customization only to client 000. No customization is imported to any other clients. In case you need to use any of the newimported to any other clients. In case you need to use any of the new customization you need to copy them from client 000. The productive operationcustomization you need to copy them from client 000. The productive operation will in no way be affected. will in no way be affected.

o How do I copy the customization from client 000 to my production client?

You can use the customizing cross system viewer to compare the customizingYou can use the customizing cross system viewer to compare the customizing across clients. The customizing transfer assistant can be used to copy the entries. across clients. The customizing transfer assistant can be used to copy the entries.

o When I change CIN objects should I register?

CIN objects do not require you to register it with SAP support. CIN objects do not require you to register it with SAP support.

o Is there an object key for CIN objects?

CIN objects do not need an object key. This is because the name range is considered asCIN objects do not need an object key. This is because the name range is considered as

add-on. add-on.

o When I try to create a new object of CIN which came through note, the system says that the name range cannot be used. What should I do?Check if the name space entries are available using transaction se03. Also checkCheck if the name space entries are available using transaction se03. Also check whether the name space is modifiable. whether the name space is modifiable.

o What are CIN name spaces?

/0SJ1I/ and /0SJ2I//0SJ1I/ and /0SJ2I/

o Is there any partner project for CIN?

For creating new objects in CIN name range you need to maintain the partnerFor creating new objects in CIN name range you need to maintain the partner project ids ‘1I’ and ‘2I’ in tables RESP and RESPT using transaction SM30. project ids ‘1I’ and ‘2I’ in tables RESP and RESPT using transaction SM30.

o Can I make a client copy excluding CIN?

It is not possible to exclude CIN data while making a client copy. It is not possible to exclude CIN data while making a client copy.

o When I maintain some of the CIN master data system is asking for a transport request. How do I avoid it?

Page 204 of 254

Page 205: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

This has been rectified. If it is still a problem please report in SAP support. AlsoThis has been rectified. If it is still a problem please report in SAP support. Also please check the following. Go into SE11. Enter the table name for which theplease check the following. Go into SE11. Enter the table name for which the maintenance is giving a problem. Display the table. Take the option – Utilities –maintenance is giving a problem. Display the table. Take the option – Utilities – table maintenance generator. Check the recording routing. It should be no, ortable maintenance generator. Check the recording routing. It should be no, or user recording routine. user recording routine.

o Which are the R3 versions on which CIN is available?

CIN is available in R3 40B 46B and 46C only. CIN is available in R3 40B 46B and 46C only.

o Are there any language versions for CIN?

No CIN is available only in English. No CIN is available only in English.

o Are there any code page restrictions for CIN while using with other language versions?

No there are no code page restrictions for CIN. CIN does not need a code page byNo there are no code page restrictions for CIN. CIN does not need a code page by itself. So it can be put with other languages. itself. So it can be put with other languages.

o I have a system with R3 and CIN. Can I upgrade R3 alone leaving CIN?

You cannot upgrade CIN alone. If you opt to ignore CIN and continue with theYou cannot upgrade CIN alone. If you opt to ignore CIN and continue with the upgrade of R3 alone then the CIN objects get deactivated in the system and it isupgrade of R3 alone then the CIN objects get deactivated in the system and it is not usable any more. A re install might lead to problems and loss of data. not usable any more. A re install might lead to problems and loss of data.

o Even after CIN is installed when I try to run any CIN program system is saying CIN is not installed. Why?

You need to apply note 411079You need to apply note 411079

o How do I restrict access to the various options under j1id ot j1it?

CIN has pre delivered authorization groups j1it and j1id. You can attach thisCIN has pre delivered authorization groups j1it and j1id. You can attach this group to the table using transaction sucu. group to the table using transaction sucu.

o How do I create new authorization groups?

You have to run a report RKSCUS09. Enter the authorization objects asYou have to run a report RKSCUS09. Enter the authorization objects as S_TABU_DIS and then you can maintain new authorization groups under this. S_TABU_DIS and then you can maintain new authorization groups under this.

o When should I install CIN?

You can install CIN after the R3 upgrade is over at any time. It is recommendedYou can install CIN after the R3 upgrade is over at any time. It is recommended that you do it along with the R3 upgrade. that you do it along with the R3 upgrade.

o How long is each version of CIN supported?

Current supported versions of CIN are CIN22B on R3 40B until June 2003,Current supported versions of CIN are CIN22B on R3 40B until June 2003, CIN30A on R3 46B until June 2003 and CIN40A on R3 46C until 2005. CIN30A on R3 46B until June 2003 and CIN40A on R3 46C until 2005.

o If I am already in a higher Support pack than is required by the add-on how do I proceed?

For CIN40A the limit is only on the minimum Support pack level. If you alreadyFor CIN40A the limit is only on the minimum Support pack level. If you already above that, then this does not cause any problem.above that, then this does not cause any problem.

o If another add-on is already installed then can I install CIN on top of it?

You need to take permission from the other add-on for this process. Contact SAP support. You need to take permission from the other add-on for this process. Contact SAP support.

o How long does a CIN installation take?

The time depends on the hardware that is available. If 4 processors and 2 GBThe time depends on the hardware that is available. If 4 processors and 2 GB RAM is allocated to that instance then it takes about 40 minutes. The maximumRAM is allocated to that instance then it takes about 40 minutes. The maximum time is about 1.5 hrs time is about 1.5 hrs

o How long does it take to upgarde CIN?

This will typically depend on the databse size. But this is rolled into the R3This will typically depend on the databse size. But this is rolled into the R3 upgrade and CIN composite upgrade will not add additional down time to the R3upgrade and CIN composite upgrade will not add additional down time to the R3 upgrade. upgrade.

o Multiple users are not able to use j1id at the same time. How do I resolve this?

Page 205 of 254

Page 206: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Master data in CIN is maintained using default table maintenance views. ThisMaster data in CIN is maintained using default table maintenance views. This poses a restriction that only one user can change the data at any given time. Thisposes a restriction that only one user can change the data at any given time. This is because of the table level lock. is because of the table level lock.

30.3 CIN MM

30.3.1 Customizationo How do I configure the system for partial credit functionality? (80:20 or 95:5 for

Cenvatable: Inventorisable)The relevant tax code should be configured with the required ratios for deductibleThe relevant tax code should be configured with the required ratios for deductible and non-deductible tax components (JMO1 and JMO2 respectively).and non-deductible tax components (JMO1 and JMO2 respectively).The partial credit indicator at the excise registration ID level should also beThe partial credit indicator at the excise registration ID level should also be marked.marked.

o What are the settings involved to run the stock transport orders through the GRPO route?For a receiving plant a customer has to be created. For a receiving plant a customer has to be created. For an issuing plant a customer and a vendor has to be created and this vendor isFor an issuing plant a customer and a vendor has to be created and this vendor is to be linked to this customer. to be linked to this customer. Both the customers have to be assigned to the plant in the Stock Transport OrderBoth the customers have to be assigned to the plant in the Stock Transport Order settings. (Transaction:OMGN)settings. (Transaction:OMGN)

o How do I change the debit account that is proposed in Excise JVs?

In the company settings of CIN IMG select the indicator “Debit AccountIn the company settings of CIN IMG select the indicator “Debit Account Overwrite” for the required company code.Overwrite” for the required company code.

o What is the difference between the ‘Depot’ indicator at the plant and the same at the excise group level?At excise group level: It indicates that for the particular combination of the exciseAt excise group level: It indicates that for the particular combination of the excise group and the plant, the plant will function as a depot.group and the plant, the plant will function as a depot.At plant level: Irrespective of the plant being attached to any excise group, theAt plant level: Irrespective of the plant being attached to any excise group, the plant attached to all the excise groups will function as a depot.plant attached to all the excise groups will function as a depot.The setting at the plant level takes precedence over that at the excise group level.The setting at the plant level takes precedence over that at the excise group level.

o Can I change the non-cenvatable condition types that have been delivered?

Page 206 of 254

Page 207: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

No. The delivered non-cenvatable condition types (e.g. JMO2 etc.) are to be usedNo. The delivered non-cenvatable condition types (e.g. JMO2 etc.) are to be used as they are.as they are.

o Can the excise popup be made to appear for any movement type?

The excise popup will appear for all those movement types that have beenThe excise popup will appear for all those movement types that have been delivered for CIN, provided these movement types are maintained in the CIN IMGdelivered for CIN, provided these movement types are maintained in the CIN IMG settings.settings.Note: Note: The users can create a copy of these standard movement types (deliveredThe users can create a copy of these standard movement types (delivered for CIN), and maintain the entry in the CIN IMG for the popup. for CIN), and maintain the entry in the CIN IMG for the popup.

o Can I segregate different actions and reference documents combinations for incoming excise invoice transaction (J1IEX)?Yes. The user has two broad options for the combinations of the actions andYes. The user has two broad options for the combinations of the actions and reference documents for the incoming excise invoice transaction.reference documents for the incoming excise invoice transaction.Define processing modes per transaction:Define processing modes per transaction:Here the user can decide the processing modes associated with the transactions.Here the user can decide the processing modes associated with the transactions. For e.g. for J1IEX capture, post, change, display and cancel options areFor e.g. for J1IEX capture, post, change, display and cancel options are available, while for J1IEX_C only capture and display options are available. Theavailable, while for J1IEX_C only capture and display options are available. The user has the freedom to change the delivered settings.user has the freedom to change the delivered settings.Define Reference Documents Per Transaction:Define Reference Documents Per Transaction:Here the user can decide the combination of the processing modes with theHere the user can decide the combination of the processing modes with the reference documents. For e.g. for the processing mode “Capture Excise Invoice”reference documents. For e.g. for the processing mode “Capture Excise Invoice” one can choose reference documents such as PO, GR, STO etc.one can choose reference documents such as PO, GR, STO etc.The user has the freedom to change the delivered settings.The user has the freedom to change the delivered settings.

o Where will I change the input/output attribute of a field of the incoming excise invoice transaction?In CIN IMG, under the Incoming Excise Invoices node the user can change theIn CIN IMG, under the Incoming Excise Invoices node the user can change the attributes of certain fields.attributes of certain fields.The user cannot add any additional fields other than the delivered ones.The user cannot add any additional fields other than the delivered ones.

o In the subcontracting attributes (CIN IMG) what is the difference between Movement Type Group Issues and Movement Type Group Receipts?Movement types that issue material from the plant to the subcontractor areMovement types that issue material from the plant to the subcontractor are grouped under the movement type group issues. Similarly, the movement typesgrouped under the movement type group issues. Similarly, the movement types that consume the materials when the processed goods are received into a plantthat consume the materials when the processed goods are received into a plant are grouped under the movement type group receipts.are grouped under the movement type group receipts.

o In the Subcontracting Challan, How should I maintain number ranges for each series group?Subcontracting Challan number ranges should not overlap between series group.Subcontracting Challan number ranges should not overlap between series group. For e.g it should NOT be as follows:For e.g it should NOT be as follows:

Series Group S1Series Group S1 : 000010000: 000010000 to 000050000to 000050000Series Group S2Series Group S2 : 000020000: 000020000 to 000050000to 000050000

Page 207 of 254

Page 208: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

o Which are the Number range objects for which number ranges needs to be maintained?Internal Document - J_1IINTNUMInternal Document - J_1IINTNUMRG23A Part1 and Part2 for all excise groups - J_1IRG23A1 & J_1IRG23A2RG23A Part1 and Part2 for all excise groups - J_1IRG23A1 & J_1IRG23A2RG23C Part1 and Part2 for all excise groups - J_1IRG23C1 & J_1IRG23C2RG23C Part1 and Part2 for all excise groups - J_1IRG23C1 & J_1IRG23C2PLA Part2 for all excise groups – J_1IPLA2PLA Part2 for all excise groups – J_1IPLA2RG1 for all excise groups – J_1IRG1RG1 for all excise groups – J_1IRG1RG23D Folio Number Generation – J_1IRG23DRG23D Folio Number Generation – J_1IRG23DOutgoing Excise Invoices against all series groups - J_1IEXCLOC &Outgoing Excise Invoices against all series groups - J_1IEXCLOC & J_1IEXCEXPJ_1IEXCEXPDepot Excise invoice number – J_1IDEPINVDepot Excise invoice number – J_1IDEPINVDispatch Register Serial number – J_1IINTPR2Dispatch Register Serial number – J_1IINTPR2Subcontracting Challan against all series group – J_1I57FCSubcontracting Challan against all series group – J_1I57FC

30.3.2 Procuremento How is the “GRs per EI setting” (at the excise group level in CIN IMG) decided?

CIN provide three options to avail CENVAT credit based on this setting.CIN provide three options to avail CENVAT credit based on this setting.Multiple GR against single excise invoice, single credit:Multiple GR against single excise invoice, single credit:The excise invoice can refer to multiple goods receipts, but the credit can beThe excise invoice can refer to multiple goods receipts, but the credit can be availed for the entire excise invoice in one shot.availed for the entire excise invoice in one shot.Multiple GR against single excise invoice, multiple credit:Multiple GR against single excise invoice, multiple credit:The excise invoice can refer to multiple goods receipts, and the credit can beThe excise invoice can refer to multiple goods receipts, and the credit can be availed individually for each goods receipt. availed individually for each goods receipt. If none of the options mentioned above are chosen:If none of the options mentioned above are chosen:The excise invoice can refer to a single goods receipt, and the credit can beThe excise invoice can refer to a single goods receipt, and the credit can be availed for the entire excise invoice in one shot.availed for the entire excise invoice in one shot.

The user can decide the option based on the business requirement in theThe user can decide the option based on the business requirement in the implementation phase. It is advised that the setting is not changed subsequently.implementation phase. It is advised that the setting is not changed subsequently.

Note: Note: This setting no longer exists at the plant level. This setting no longer exists at the plant level.

o Can I have multiple accounts for the same process?

Yes. This is possible by using the option of subtransaction type in association withYes. This is possible by using the option of subtransaction type in association with the transaction type.the transaction type.

o What will transaction type do?

CIN uses transaction type as a way of differentiating between the various exciseCIN uses transaction type as a way of differentiating between the various excise related processes. They are:related processes. They are:

GRPO – Goods receipt for purchase order in Plant. Also used in DepotGRPO – Goods receipt for purchase order in Plant. Also used in Depot for a PO and material documentfor a PO and material document

EWPO – Excise invoice without purchase order EWPO – Excise invoice without purchase order 57FC 57FC - Subcontracting Challan- Subcontracting Challan57NR – Reversal and Recredit for Subcontracting Challan57NR – Reversal and Recredit for Subcontracting Challan

Page 208 of 254

Page 209: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

CAPE- Capital Goods credit accountsCAPE- Capital Goods credit accountsOTHR- Excise Invoice for Other MovementsOTHR- Excise Invoice for Other MovementsDLFC- Factory Sale and Stock Transfer via SDDLFC- Factory Sale and Stock Transfer via SDCEIV- Cancellation of Generated Excise InvoiceCEIV- Cancellation of Generated Excise InvoiceDIEX- Differential Excise Invoice CreditDIEX- Differential Excise Invoice CreditMRDY- Excise Duty reversal without referenceMRDY- Excise Duty reversal without referenceMRRD- Excise Duty reversal if material used for non-productionMRRD- Excise Duty reversal if material used for non-productionMRWO- Excise Duty Reversal for Write off CasesMRWO- Excise Duty Reversal for Write off CasesTR6C - PLA account adjustment through TR6 ChallanTR6C - PLA account adjustment through TR6 ChallanUTLZ- is used for determining the accounts when a JV is posted with anUTLZ- is used for determining the accounts when a JV is posted with an

option of fortnightly paymentoption of fortnightly payment

The Transaction type that are not used : 57CM, 57GR, CAGI, CAGR,The Transaction type that are not used : 57CM, 57GR, CAGI, CAGR, GRTR.GRTR.

o Can I have my own transaction types?

No. Various transaction types are used by CIN and are predelivered.No. Various transaction types are used by CIN and are predelivered.

o Does the system determine the modvat clearing account during invoice verification?Yes, provided the purchase order has deductible excise duty.Yes, provided the purchase order has deductible excise duty.

o What is EWPO? When do you use it?

EWPO stands for excise invoice without purchase order. For e.g. Excise invoiceEWPO stands for excise invoice without purchase order. For e.g. Excise invoice of free samples are captured in the system using EWPO.of free samples are captured in the system using EWPO.

o What is the functionality of the rejection code/reason code?

For some reasons if the user wants to withhold the availement of CENVAT credit,For some reasons if the user wants to withhold the availement of CENVAT credit, he can do so by posting the excise invoice with a reason code. This reason codehe can do so by posting the excise invoice with a reason code. This reason code will post the credit amount to an ONHOLD account. The user can later post thiswill post the credit amount to an ONHOLD account. The user can later post this ONHOLD amount to the CENVAT accounts. There is an indicator associated withONHOLD amount to the CENVAT accounts. There is an indicator associated with the reason code in CIN IMG, which will decide the posting of the credit amount tothe reason code in CIN IMG, which will decide the posting of the credit amount to ONHOLD.ONHOLD.

NoteNote: It is recommended that separate GL accounts for ON-HOLD account for: It is recommended that separate GL accounts for ON-HOLD account for transaction type GRPO and CAPE. Account at GRPO will be used by Rejectiontransaction type GRPO and CAPE. Account at GRPO will be used by Rejection code and the one at CAPE will be used for subsequent credit of capital goods.code and the one at CAPE will be used for subsequent credit of capital goods.

During Excise Invoice cancellation, reason code can be used. During Excise Invoice cancellation, reason code can be used.

Page 209 of 254

Page 210: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

o After the transaction J1IEX has been executed, what is the significance of the status popup?The status popup is a way to give information to the user of the various exciseThe status popup is a way to give information to the user of the various excise entries that happen during the course of running the transaction. For e.g. theentries that happen during the course of running the transaction. For e.g. the status Part1 number: N.A. means that no part1 number was generated during thestatus Part1 number: N.A. means that no part1 number was generated during the course of running the transactions.course of running the transactions.

o What does the ‘Restore Defaults’ checkbox on the Duty Values item tabstrip of J1IEX do?Restore defaults option restores the material type, duty rates, quantities, dutyRestore defaults option restores the material type, duty rates, quantities, duty values for that line item to the original values that were defaulted the time whenvalues for that line item to the original values that were defaulted the time when the transaction is run.the transaction is run.

o I always get the Item ok in J1IEX transaction as selected, how do I avoid that in case I don’t need the Item ok selected by default?Mark the User Parameter ID ‘J4X’ with ‘X’ for a User ID.Mark the User Parameter ID ‘J4X’ with ‘X’ for a User ID.

o Can you explain the different rows of duties on the Duty Values item tabstrip of J1IEX?

Credit availed:Credit availed: Excise duty whose credit has been availed. Excise duty whose credit has been availed.Inventorized duty:Inventorized duty: It is the excise duty for which credit has not been availed but It is the excise duty for which credit has not been availed but has been added / will be added to the material cost.has been added / will be added to the material cost.Credit due:Credit due: Excise duty whose credit has not been availed because the goods have Excise duty whose credit has not been availed because the goods have not been received and entered in the RG23 Part1 register.not been received and entered in the RG23 Part1 register.Credit Available:Credit Available: Excise duty whose credit has not been availed, but the goods Excise duty whose credit has not been availed, but the goods have been received and entered in the RG23 Part1 register.have been received and entered in the RG23 Part1 register.ST: ST: Sales Tax for the line item.Sales Tax for the line item.

o What does the ‘Calculate excise duty based on rates’ checkbox on the Duty rates item tabstrip of J1IEX do?The user has the option of changing the duty rates for the line items in the exciseThe user has the option of changing the duty rates for the line items in the excise invoice. If the user wishes to change the duty values based on the changes in theinvoice. If the user wishes to change the duty values based on the changes in the duty rates he needs to select the duty rates he needs to select the ‘Calculate excise duty based on rates’ ‘Calculate excise duty based on rates’ checkbox.checkbox.

o What is a single step credit availment process?

The process of capturing the excise invoice and availing credit of excise duty in aThe process of capturing the excise invoice and availing credit of excise duty in a single step is now possible if the excise is captured with reference to a goodssingle step is now possible if the excise is captured with reference to a goods receipt for a purchase order. This is possible even in the EWPO cycle.receipt for a purchase order. This is possible even in the EWPO cycle.

Page 210 of 254

Page 211: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

o When are the ‘Simulate CENVAT Credit’ and the ‘Post CENVAT’ buttons active?

These buttons will be active if the entry has been posted in the RG23 Part1These buttons will be active if the entry has been posted in the RG23 Part1 register for the GRPO cycle and there is credit available to be availed.register for the GRPO cycle and there is credit available to be availed.These buttons will always be active during the EWPO cycle. These buttons will always be active during the EWPO cycle. The user should have the necessary authorization to post an excise invoice.The user should have the necessary authorization to post an excise invoice.

o While capturing an excise invoice for EWPO (without reference to any material document), how does one enter multiple lines?For the first line item the user needs to enter the details of the line item such asFor the first line item the user needs to enter the details of the line item such as the material number, plant, chapter ID, duty rate, quantity etc. follwed bythe material number, plant, chapter ID, duty rate, quantity etc. follwed by pressing ENTER. To enter a new line item the user needs to press the ‘Next Item’pressing ENTER. To enter a new line item the user needs to press the ‘Next Item’ Button.Button.

o When price control 5 is set for a purchase order, how is excise duty computed?

The base value of the material is the value on the date on which the vendor'sThe base value of the material is the value on the date on which the vendor's excise invoice is created.excise invoice is created.The duty is computed on this base value.The duty is computed on this base value.

o How are the accounts determined when capital goods are procured?

When cenvat credit for the capital goods are availed for the first 50%, the creditWhen cenvat credit for the capital goods are availed for the first 50%, the credit accounts are picked from GRPO transaction type and debit accounts from theaccounts are picked from GRPO transaction type and debit accounts from the CAPE. CAPE. During Subsequent credit availment both credit and debit entries are picked fromDuring Subsequent credit availment both credit and debit entries are picked from CAPE. CAPE.

o What needs to be done if the Excise Invoice quantity is not equal to GR quantity?

Excise Invoice Quantity is less than GR quantity: System will default warningExcise Invoice Quantity is less than GR quantity: System will default warning message and this can be configured in CIN IMG as required. Apart from that themessage and this can be configured in CIN IMG as required. Apart from that the Part1 entry will be done only for the open quanity in the excise invoice. And thePart1 entry will be done only for the open quanity in the excise invoice. And the remaining will not appear in the excise registers. Since nothing can be done aboutremaining will not appear in the excise registers. Since nothing can be done about it, ensure you do another GR for the difference quanitity with no excise entry. Orit, ensure you do another GR for the difference quanitity with no excise entry. Or

Page 211 of 254

Page 212: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

in the case excise invoice for this difference will be dispatched by the vendorin the case excise invoice for this difference will be dispatched by the vendor later, you can create a separate GR and just create a Part1 entry.later, you can create a separate GR and just create a Part1 entry.Excise Invoice Quantity is greater than GR quantity: Credit will be allowed onlyExcise Invoice Quantity is greater than GR quantity: Credit will be allowed only for GR quantity. To take credit for remaining check your Multiple GR for anfor GR quantity. To take credit for remaining check your Multiple GR for an excise invoice setting at excise group.excise invoice setting at excise group.

o What should be my accounting entry in procurement?

For Domestic Procurement of Raw MaterialFor Domestic Procurement of Raw MaterialDuring GRDuring GR

Material Stock Material Stock Dr.Dr.GR/IR clearingGR/IR clearing Cr.Cr.

During Excise Invoice CreditDuring Excise Invoice CreditCenvat AccountCenvat Account Dr.Dr.Cenvat ClearingCenvat Clearing Cr.Cr.

During Invoice VerificationDuring Invoice VerificationCenvat ClearingCenvat Clearing Dr.Dr.GR/IR ClearingGR/IR Clearing Dr.Dr.Vendor PayableVendor Payable Cr.Cr.

For Domestic proceurement of Capital GoodsFor Domestic proceurement of Capital GoodsDuring GRDuring GR

Material Stock Material Stock Dr.Dr.GR/IR clearingGR/IR clearing Cr.Cr.

During Excise Invoice CreditDuring Excise Invoice CreditCenvat AccountCenvat Account Dr.Dr. (50%)(50%)Cenvat On-holdCenvat On-hold Dr.Dr. (50%)(50%)Cenvat ClearingCenvat Clearing Cr.Cr.

During Invoice VerificationDuring Invoice VerificationCenvat ClearingCenvat Clearing Dr.Dr.GR/IR ClearingGR/IR Clearing Dr.Dr.Vendor PayableVendor Payable CrCr

Subsequent of Capital GoodsSubsequent of Capital GoodsCenvat AccountCenvat Account Dr.Dr. (50%)(50%)Cenvat On-holdCenvat On-hold Cr.Cr. (50%)(50%)

For Import Procurement of Raw MaterialFor Import Procurement of Raw Material

During Customs Duty Clearing invoice During Customs Duty Clearing invoice Custom ClearingCustom Clearing Dr.Dr.Custom PayableCustom Payable Cr.Cr.

During GRDuring GRMaterial Stock Material Stock Dr.Dr.GR/IR clearingGR/IR clearing Cr.Cr.

During Excise Invoice CreditDuring Excise Invoice CreditCenvat AccountCenvat Account Dr.Dr.Custom ClearingCustom Clearing Cr.Cr.

Page 212 of 254

Page 213: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

During Invoice VerificationDuring Invoice VerificationGR/IR ClearingGR/IR Clearing Dr.Dr.Vendor PayableVendor Payable Cr.Cr.

For Excise Duty Credit of Raw Material without POFor Excise Duty Credit of Raw Material without PO

Cenvat AccountCenvat Account Dr.Dr.Cenvat ClearingCenvat Clearing Cr.Cr.

For Excise Duty Reversal through Excise JVFor Excise Duty Reversal through Excise JV

Cenvat ClearingCenvat Clearing Dr.Dr.Cenvat AccountCenvat Account Cr.Cr.

o What should be my accounting entry when the goods are issued through MM and excise invoice is created (J1IS & J1IV)?

During Excise Invoice CreationDuring Excise Invoice CreationCenvat Suspense AccountCenvat Suspense Account Dr.Dr.Cenvat payableCenvat payable Cr.Cr.

For TR6C ChallanFor TR6C ChallanPLA AccountPLA Account Dr.Dr.PLA on hold AccountPLA on hold Account Cr.Cr.

During Fortnightly UtilizationDuring Fortnightly UtilizationCenvat payableCenvat payable Dr.Dr.Cenvat AccountCenvat Account Cr.Cr.PLA AccountPLA Account Cr.Cr.

Note: Cenvat Suspense Account should be cleared apprpiately using FI JV’s.Note: Cenvat Suspense Account should be cleared apprpiately using FI JV’s.

30.3.3 Subcontractingo How is the recursive BoM scenario (the parent and the child material being the

same) handled in subcontracting?The movement type group for receipts should hold the 543-movement type onlyThe movement type group for receipts should hold the 543-movement type only instead of the 101-movement type. instead of the 101-movement type.

o For which of the movements will I run the Quantity Reconciliation for the subcontracting challan?Quantity reconciliation is run for the movement types that automatically generateQuantity reconciliation is run for the movement types that automatically generate the consumption line, for e.g. movement 105, 101. This transaction is also run forthe consumption line, for e.g. movement 105, 101. This transaction is also run for reversals of issue movements, for e.g. 542.reversals of issue movements, for e.g. 542.

Page 213 of 254

Page 214: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

o How do I delete challans assigned to the Goods Receipts document?

Goto transaction for Quantity Reconciliation (J1IFQ). Use Menupath QuantityGoto transaction for Quantity Reconciliation (J1IFQ). Use Menupath Quantity Reconcile->Delete assigmentReconcile->Delete assigment

o What should be my accounting entry in subcontracting reversal / Recredit ?

For Subcontracting Challan ReversalFor Subcontracting Challan ReversalCenvat ReversalCenvat Reversal Dr.Dr.Cenvat AccountCenvat Account Cr.Cr.

For Subcontracting Challan RecreditFor Subcontracting Challan RecreditCenvat AccountCenvat Account Dr.Dr.Cenvat ReversalCenvat Reversal Cr.Cr.

30.4 CIN SD

o How does CIN determine the tax rates?

CIN determines taxes based on the chapter-id of the material. There are 2 levelsCIN determines taxes based on the chapter-id of the material. There are 2 levels for rate determination. First the system will check if there is an exceptional ratefor rate determination. First the system will check if there is an exceptional rate available. If this is available then that rate is picked up. This rate could be for aavailable. If this is available then that rate is picked up. This rate could be for a material or material and customer combination. If there are no exceptions thenmaterial or material and customer combination. If there are no exceptions then the system looks for chapter-id of that material. The customer will have an excisethe system looks for chapter-id of that material. The customer will have an excise tax status which along with the plant status will give a final excise status. Basedtax status which along with the plant status will give a final excise status. Based on the excise status and the chapter-id the rates are maintained. on the excise status and the chapter-id the rates are maintained.

o Can I change the tax rates retrospectively?

You can change the excise rates with any given validity period. After making theYou can change the excise rates with any given validity period. After making the changes you will have to update the sales orders if the new tax rates have to bechanges you will have to update the sales orders if the new tax rates have to be considered for future deliveries. considered for future deliveries.

o Can I have a different rate for incoming and outgoing transactions for the same material?

You can maintain exceptional rates for either incoming or outgoing based on theYou can maintain exceptional rates for either incoming or outgoing based on the volume of exceptions data. volume of exceptions data.

o What do I do if I have one chapter-id for incoming and another for outgoing and material code is the same?Along with exceptional rate maintenance you can maintain the chapter-id whichAlong with exceptional rate maintenance you can maintain the chapter-id which should be used for the outgoing transactions. This chapter-id will be used only forshould be used for the outgoing transactions. This chapter-id will be used only for copying on to the document and will not be used for rate determination.copying on to the document and will not be used for rate determination.

o Can I have some more additional rates?

You can maintain multiple excise indicators and based on that you can have additionalYou can maintain multiple excise indicators and based on that you can have additional

rates.rates.

o What will happen if I have multiple rates with overlapping validity periods for the same chapter-id and tax indicator?While picking up the rate for a given transaction system will check for thatWhile picking up the rate for a given transaction system will check for that validity period where the valid from is the maximum but with in the pricing datevalidity period where the valid from is the maximum but with in the pricing date and based on that pick up the rate applicable.and based on that pick up the rate applicable.

o How does CIN do the pricing?

Page 214 of 254

Page 215: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

CIN uses R3 condition technique for pricing along with the pricing formulae.CIN uses R3 condition technique for pricing along with the pricing formulae. Details are available in the CIN knowledge bank. Template pricing proceduresDetails are available in the CIN knowledge bank. Template pricing procedures are provided for various sales scenarios. are provided for various sales scenarios.

o How many tax codes do I need?

The number of tax codes will directly depend on how you want to account theThe number of tax codes will directly depend on how you want to account the sales tax. You can have CST and LST being determined by the same tax code ifsales tax. You can have CST and LST being determined by the same tax code if both can be accrued into the same account. Instead if you need separate accountboth can be accrued into the same account. Instead if you need separate account determination then you need separate tax codes. Also based on the taxdetermination then you need separate tax codes. Also based on the tax concessions available you need to decide the various tax rates which need to beconcessions available you need to decide the various tax rates which need to be mapped. mapped.

o How do I open up more than one tax classification?

CIN comes with default customization to open up the tax classificvation fields. The procedure is asCIN comes with default customization to open up the tax classificvation fields. The procedure is as follows. You need to define as many condition types as the number of tax classification fields. Tbe follows. You need to define as many condition types as the number of tax classification fields. Tbe following procedure could be used. following procedure could be used.

SPRO - Sales and distribution -Basic functions-Taxes - Tax SPRO - Sales and distribution -Basic functions-Taxes - Tax

determination rules For Country 'IN' make entries as follows (This determination rules For Country 'IN' make entries as follows (This

is precustomized in client 000 ) is precustomized in client 000 )

- Seq 1 - UTXJ - Seq 1 - UTXJ

- Seq 2 - JTX1 - Seq 2 - JTX1

- Seq 3 - JTX2 - Seq 3 - JTX2

- Seq 4 - JTX3 - Seq 4 - JTX3

o In SPRO - Sales and Distribution - Basic functions - Taxes o In SPRO - Sales and Distribution - Basic functions - Taxes

Determine tax relevancy of master recordsDetermine tax relevancy of master records

o How do I handle concessional excise?

This is explained in SAP note 335577. Having opened up the new tax classification This is explained in SAP note 335577. Having opened up the new tax classification

fields you might have to do the followingfields you might have to do the following

o Customer taxes maintain the possible values for JTX3 . Each unique value should denote one o Customer taxes maintain the possible values for JTX3 . Each unique value should denote one concession rate. For eg 1 - normal excise duty concession rate. For eg 1 - normal excise duty

o Maintain the JTX3 value against the form code in J1IT -Define Form types o Maintain the JTX3 value against the form code in J1IT -Define Form types

Maintain the customer tax classification in customer master if the customer has got Maintain the customer tax classification in customer master if the customer has got

excise exemption excise exemption

o Maintain the excise indicator in J1ID for the customer and form code and this indicator gives o Maintain the excise indicator in J1ID for the customer and form code and this indicator gives the final indicator the final indicator

Page 215 of 254

Page 216: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

o Forms database is used for determination of whether the form has arrived or not at the time of o Forms database is used for determination of whether the form has arrived or not at the time of billing. billing.

o The tax classification value gets defaulted from the customer master in the sales order. This o The tax classification value gets defaulted from the customer master in the sales order. This can be changed in the header can be changed in the header

billing data if required billing data if required

o How do I handle sales tax concessions?

o SPRO - Sales and distribution -Basic functions-Taxes - Tax determination rules For Country 'IN' o SPRO - Sales and distribution -Basic functions-Taxes - Tax determination rules For Country 'IN' make entries as follows (This is precustomized in client 000 ) make entries as follows (This is precustomized in client 000 )

- Seq 1 - UTXJ - Seq 1 - UTXJ

- Seq 2 - JTX1 - Seq 2 - JTX1

- Seq 3 - JTX2 - Seq 3 - JTX2

- Seq 4 - JTX3 - Seq 4 - JTX3

o Taxes - Determine tax relevancy of master records - Customer taxes maintain the possible o Taxes - Determine tax relevancy of master records - Customer taxes maintain the possible values for JTX1 and JTX2. Each unique value should denote one concession rate. For eg 1 - 4% . values for JTX1 and JTX2. Each unique value should denote one concession rate. For eg 1 - 4% . Multiple forms could correspond to a single rate. JTX1 could be used for CST and JTX2 for Multiple forms could correspond to a single rate. JTX1 could be used for CST and JTX2 for LST. (UTXJ could be freely used by the customers as earlier ) LST. (UTXJ could be freely used by the customers as earlier )

o Maintain the tax classification in customer master as well as o Maintain the tax classification in customer master as well as

material master ( Sales org data 2) material master ( Sales org data 2)

Build access sequences based on these new fields to point to the correct sales tax code You might Build access sequences based on these new fields to point to the correct sales tax code You might have to have a new access based on region of delivering plant and region of ship to party have to have a new access based on region of delivering plant and region of ship to party

o How will CIN handle Indian VAT?

SAP can handle normal VAT regulations. CIN will take a review of the VAT ruleSAP can handle normal VAT regulations. CIN will take a review of the VAT rule when it is implemented in India and suggest the best business process to complywhen it is implemented in India and suggest the best business process to comply with the same. with the same.

o When I create a new tax code the excise lines are grey and I cannot maintain any value. What should I do?This is happening because the Excise conditions for sales are statistical in the taxThis is happening because the Excise conditions for sales are statistical in the tax procedure for India. So while creating a new tax code you need to open the taxprocedure for India. So while creating a new tax code you need to open the tax procedure remove the statistical flag, maintain 100% for all excise conditions.procedure remove the statistical flag, maintain 100% for all excise conditions. After saving the tax code you need to make the conditions statistical once again. After saving the tax code you need to make the conditions statistical once again.

o When I release the billing document to accounting there is an error that the account key is missing?

Page 216 of 254

Page 217: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

This is happening because one or more lines in the tax procedure has a conditionThis is happening because one or more lines in the tax procedure has a condition with a value but is not marked statistical. You need to check whether thewith a value but is not marked statistical. You need to check whether the conditions JMOD, JAED, JSED and JCES are marked statistical in the taxconditions JMOD, JAED, JSED and JCES are marked statistical in the tax procedure. You cannot rectify the documents which are in error. The correctionprocedure. You cannot rectify the documents which are in error. The correction takes into effect only the future orders. takes into effect only the future orders.

o When I release to accounting I get a message tax amount greater than tax base?

This is happening because the tax base for some tax condition is falling less thanThis is happening because the tax base for some tax condition is falling less than the tax base amount. R3 does not allow the tax base to fall below the tax amount.the tax base amount. R3 does not allow the tax base to fall below the tax amount. You need to check which condition is giving the problem and based on that youYou need to check which condition is giving the problem and based on that you can verify the tax procedure from-to settings. can verify the tax procedure from-to settings.

o Do I need to maintain the chapter-ids for each plant or can it be left blank?

If the same chapter-id is applicable for the material in all the plants then you needIf the same chapter-id is applicable for the material in all the plants then you need not maintain the chapter-ids for all the plants. You can leave the plant blank.not maintain the chapter-ids for all the plants. You can leave the plant blank.

o When I try printing the excise register nothing comes up?

Check whether you have maintained the opening balance for the item in theCheck whether you have maintained the opening balance for the item in the corresponding register (Table J_2IACCBAL for register account balances). Nextcorresponding register (Table J_2IACCBAL for register account balances). Next check whether you have maintained the sapscript forms which are used forcheck whether you have maintained the sapscript forms which are used for printing the registers in the CIN configuration. Finally check whether theprinting the registers in the CIN configuration. Finally check whether the extraction has been done for the period. extraction has been done for the period.

o When I try printing the excise invoice the list line turns red and nothing happens?

This is becaue you have not maintained the condition record for outputThis is becaue you have not maintained the condition record for output determination. You need to maintain the condition record for outputdetermination. You need to maintain the condition record for output determination at the sold to party level. Also for the documents created alreadydetermination at the sold to party level. Also for the documents created already you can go into Billing header – output and manually enter the output type j1ioyou can go into Billing header – output and manually enter the output type j1io and save. Later the excise invoices can be printed. and save. Later the excise invoices can be printed.

o When I try to create RG1 issues entry the line turns red and nothing happens?

This is happening because you are trying to create an issue entry and the stock inThis is happening because you are trying to create an issue entry and the stock in the register is not enough to do the issue. So you need to first update RG1 with thethe register is not enough to do the issue. So you need to first update RG1 with the receipts and then go into the issues. receipts and then go into the issues.

o I have extracted the register data once but now I have added more transactions. Can I extract once more?

You can re-extract the data if you have added more transaction data for the given period. You can re-extract the data if you have added more transaction data for the given period.

o I am using another package for printing registers. Can I download the data once again?

To prevent data inconsistency in the third party application CIN does not allowTo prevent data inconsistency in the third party application CIN does not allow you to re download the register data once it has already been downloaded. you to re download the register data once it has already been downloaded.

o What is the issue classification for RG1?

You need to classify the RG1 entries as to whether they are receipts fromYou need to classify the RG1 entries as to whether they are receipts from manufacture or other receipts, clearances of various types so that they can bemanufacture or other receipts, clearances of various types so that they can be reported under the various headings as required by the Excise commissionerate. reported under the various headings as required by the Excise commissionerate.

o How do I maintain the opening balances for my register for the first time?

You need load them manually at the initial data uploadYou need load them manually at the initial data upload..

o How do I get the opening balance for every month?

CIN calculates the opening balance for reporting purposes based on theCIN calculates the opening balance for reporting purposes based on the transaction s extracted in any period. transaction s extracted in any period.

o Are opening and closing balances of reghister available for me for reporting?

Page 217 of 254

Page 218: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

You must not pick up the opening and closing balances that are calculated byYou must not pick up the opening and closing balances that are calculated by reporting because they might get changed if some one does a re extract. So theyreporting because they might get changed if some one does a re extract. So they need to be recomputed dynamically. They are not stored. need to be recomputed dynamically. They are not stored.

o Can I round the duty at the header level?

Duty can be rounded off in CIN only at the item level. Due to technical reasonsDuty can be rounded off in CIN only at the item level. Due to technical reasons duty round off is not provided at the header level. duty round off is not provided at the header level.

o When I create an excise invoice for exports what exchange rate will the system take?

System picks up the exchange rate which is maintained in the CIN configurationSystem picks up the exchange rate which is maintained in the CIN configuration data for the company code. data for the company code.

o With fortnightly utilization why do I need a part2 entry at the time of Excise invoice creation?With fortnightly utilization you do not create an entry in the CENVAT or PLAWith fortnightly utilization you do not create an entry in the CENVAT or PLA registers. Instead CIN keeps a separate Despatch register and generatesregisters. Instead CIN keeps a separate Despatch register and generates continuous serial numbers in this register that can be used for futurecontinuous serial numbers in this register that can be used for future reconciliation. reconciliation.

o Do I need to have balances in my CENVAT accounts at the time of Excise invoice creation?At the time of excise invoice creation the debit is being made into an ExciseAt the time of excise invoice creation the debit is being made into an Excise payable account. So you need not have balances in the CENVAT account. Youpayable account. So you need not have balances in the CENVAT account. You need to have enough money at the time of fortnightly utilization or you shouldneed to have enough money at the time of fortnightly utilization or you should have made a debit through TR6 into PLA. have made a debit through TR6 into PLA.

o What are the exceptional reports possible?

You can list all the billing documents for which excise invoice is not created. You can get a list of You can list all the billing documents for which excise invoice is not created. You can get a list of all excise invoices for which billing document has been cancelled., You can also have a report of all excise invoices for which billing document has been cancelled., You can also have a report of all cancelled excise invoice for which the billing document is still openall cancelled excise invoice for which the billing document is still open.

o Can I know which are the billing documents for which there is no excise invoice?

Excise due list gives you all billing documents for which there is no excise invoice.Excise due list gives you all billing documents for which there is no excise invoice.

o Number range skipping happens for excise invoice. What could be the reason?

CIN number ranges are defined as not buffered. You need to check if this has beenCIN number ranges are defined as not buffered. You need to check if this has been changed. If skipping happens never reset the number range.. you must report thechanged. If skipping happens never reset the number range.. you must report the problem to SAP support immediately so that they can help you resolve this. problem to SAP support immediately so that they can help you resolve this.

o While doing excise invoice creation I get an error message that system failure during locking. What can I do?While creating the excise invoice, at the time of saving system tries to lock the GLWhile creating the excise invoice, at the time of saving system tries to lock the GL account that is getting updated with the new balances. S probably some one elseaccount that is getting updated with the new balances. S probably some one else could be changing the GL account data at that point of time. This is a very shortcould be changing the GL account data at that point of time. This is a very short phenomena and is meant to keep the data consistency. phenomena and is meant to keep the data consistency.

o While doing depot sales invoice selection, list of invoices are not getting displayed. Why?

You need to check the customization settings for LIFOor FIFO and the invoices ofYou need to check the customization settings for LIFOor FIFO and the invoices of which period you have set. Also you need to check the excise group which is beingwhich period you have set. Also you need to check the excise group which is being used. System will show you only those excise invoices which belong to the sameused. System will show you only those excise invoices which belong to the same excise group, plant, storage location and batch.excise group, plant, storage location and batch.

o How do I handle the a-certificate at depot?

A certificates come when the goods are removed after paying a provisional duty.A certificates come when the goods are removed after paying a provisional duty. When the final price is decided at the time of the order you need to pay theWhen the final price is decided at the time of the order you need to pay the balance of the duty. There is no facility at the moment to calculate the differentialbalance of the duty. There is no facility at the moment to calculate the differential duty. You have to make the payment manully using J1IS at the factory. Once thisduty. You have to make the payment manully using J1IS at the factory. Once this

Page 218 of 254

Page 219: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

is done you can go back to the depot and capture this extra payment into youris done you can go back to the depot and capture this extra payment into your RG23D. This is recorded as a new serial no with in the original folio so that theRG23D. This is recorded as a new serial no with in the original folio so that the RG23D register value tally. At the time of selection of excise invoice for sale youRG23D register value tally. At the time of selection of excise invoice for sale you have the option to pick up the a-certificates for the excise invoice and then thehave the option to pick up the a-certificates for the excise invoice and then the additional duty gets added into the invoice amount. Also this is reflected in theadditional duty gets added into the invoice amount. Also this is reflected in the RG23D register. RG23D register.

o Is it possible to add some additional duty on to the depot invoice with out A certificate?

No you need an A certificate if you have to get an additional duty in RG23DNo you need an A certificate if you have to get an additional duty in RG23D invoice. Alternative is to write customer specific routines which are not supportedinvoice. Alternative is to write customer specific routines which are not supported by CIN. by CIN.

o How do I handle the returns at depot?

If there are returns to depot, that can be captured as any other receipt. You canIf there are returns to depot, that can be captured as any other receipt. You can enter the material document no of the return receipt and the data gets copid andenter the material document no of the return receipt and the data gets copid and you can copy into RG23D. you can copy into RG23D.

o How do I handle returns at factory?

There are no D3 procedures at the moment which is mandated by the exciseThere are no D3 procedures at the moment which is mandated by the excise department. Legally you can take credit for all the receipts and then pay the dutydepartment. Legally you can take credit for all the receipts and then pay the duty when it goes out after repair or to another customer. You can Excise invoicewhen it goes out after repair or to another customer. You can Excise invoice without PO route to take the credit. without PO route to take the credit.

o When I do excise invoice creation, the system issues a message not enough balance. Why?This does not happen any more. There was a need felt that we should check theThis does not happen any more. There was a need felt that we should check the balance s even though we can pay the duty 15 days hence. balance s even though we can pay the duty 15 days hence.

o I am not able to save the excise invoice text?

You need to check the object type for the object id J1IN. this can be done byYou need to check the object type for the object id J1IN. this can be done by checking the data of the view J_1IVTTXOB. The editor mode has to be set aschecking the data of the view J_1IVTTXOB. The editor mode has to be set as ‘Application text with SAVE key ‘.‘Application text with SAVE key ‘.

o How can I include more text ids for the excise invoice?

You can use the CIN IMG text maintenance option and add more ids withYou can use the CIN IMG text maintenance option and add more ids with descriptors. For excise invoice creation the object is J1II. For depot receipts thedescriptors. For excise invoice creation the object is J1II. For depot receipts the object is J1IG and for depot sales it is J1IJ. object is J1IG and for depot sales it is J1IJ.

o Where does the excise invoice get the business area from?

Excise invoice does not allow entry of business area. The business area in theExcise invoice does not allow entry of business area. The business area in the billing document is automatically taken for the excise invoice. billing document is automatically taken for the excise invoice.

o Where does the excise invoice get the profit center from?

Excise invoice picks up the profit center from the billing document if it isExcise invoice picks up the profit center from the billing document if it is available there. If it is not available there then it looks at the plant specificavailable there. If it is not available there then it looks at the plant specific material master data and picks up if available. material master data and picks up if available.

o Why do I need tax jurisdiction?

Tax jurisdiction codes are one method by which you can maintain tax rates withTax jurisdiction codes are one method by which you can maintain tax rates with out having multitude of tax codes. You can maintain the LST effectively with oneout having multitude of tax codes. You can maintain the LST effectively with one tax code and multiple jurisdiction. tax code and multiple jurisdiction.

o Can I do away with jurisdiction code?

You have to use tax jurisdiction code with the standard CIN. If you do not want toYou have to use tax jurisdiction code with the standard CIN. If you do not want to make use of that for rate determination you should at least have one jurisdictionmake use of that for rate determination you should at least have one jurisdiction at the federal level. at the federal level.

o What will the system do if I have not received the form at the time of billing?

Page 219 of 254

Page 220: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

The system will first check in the Form type maintenance whether the form isThe system will first check in the Form type maintenance whether the form is marked as required. This means that the form has to come by the time billingmarked as required. This means that the form has to come by the time billing happens. Once you receive the form you need to enter it into the forms data basehappens. Once you receive the form you need to enter it into the forms data base (J1IU) for the delivery document number. If the form receipt is not maintained(J1IU) for the delivery document number. If the form receipt is not maintained then the billing will do a repricing and charge full tax for the particular excisethen the billing will do a repricing and charge full tax for the particular excise duty. duty.

o How does fortnightly utilization determine the accounts to be posted?

There is no transaction type for determining the accounts of the fortnightly utilization. The credit There is no transaction type for determining the accounts of the fortnightly utilization. The credit account of the transaction type ‘DLFC ‘ is used as the debit account here. For the credit side we account of the transaction type ‘DLFC ‘ is used as the debit account here. For the credit side we pick the debit accounts from the GRPO, EWPO and TR6C transactions. So it is mandatory that pick the debit accounts from the GRPO, EWPO and TR6C transactions. So it is mandatory that whether you use EWPO or not you should have maintained the account determination for all whether you use EWPO or not you should have maintained the account determination for all transaction tyes for a given excise group. transaction tyes for a given excise group.

o What is transaction type ‘UTLZ’ used for?

Transaction type UTLZ is used for determining the accounts when a JV is postedTransaction type UTLZ is used for determining the accounts when a JV is posted with an option of fortnightly payment. with an option of fortnightly payment.

o Can I have my own transaction types?

Transaction types are used internally by CIN for various pruposes. So you cannotTransaction types are used internally by CIN for various pruposes. So you cannot define your wn transaction types. Alternate account assignments can be donedefine your wn transaction types. Alternate account assignments can be done using sub transaction types. using sub transaction types.

o Where does RG1 get the data of packed/loose material ?

Initially when you upload the balance in RG1 you need to mention the materialInitially when you upload the balance in RG1 you need to mention the material form. Later the system assumes the same for for the same material code. If youform. Later the system assumes the same for for the same material code. If you need to dynamically change this then you can make use of the user-exit. Aneed to dynamically change this then you can make use of the user-exit. A material can be marked either as packed or loose but not both.material can be marked either as packed or loose but not both.

o What will batch utilization of modvat do?

Batch utilization is just an interface that helps you to complete the utilization of a set of documentsBatch utilization is just an interface that helps you to complete the utilization of a set of documents in one step. This simply triggers individual utilization as a BDC so that the user interaction can bein one step. This simply triggers individual utilization as a BDC so that the user interaction can be minimizedminimized.

o What is the number range used for export excise invoice?

Export invoices uses the number range object j_1iexcexp where as the localExport invoices uses the number range object j_1iexcexp where as the local invoices uses the number range j_1iexcloc. Even though customers are free to useinvoices uses the number range j_1iexcloc. Even though customers are free to use the same number series now there is no bar from using separate series. the same number series now there is no bar from using separate series.

o Can I create a zero duty excise invoice?

Zero duty invoices can be created both from sales as wellas using excise invoiceZero duty invoices can be created both from sales as wellas using excise invoice other movements based on the business requirement. These invoices do notother movements based on the business requirement. These invoices do not generate an accounting document. generate an accounting document.

o Is it possible to cancel an excise invoice with zero duty?

There is no problem in canceling a zero duty excise invoice. There is no problem in canceling a zero duty excise invoice.

o Where does the billing document get the account for excise duty payable?

The account determination rules of R3 billing is used for determining the accountThe account determination rules of R3 billing is used for determining the account for the excise posting line in a billing document. The CIN customization has nofor the excise posting line in a billing document. The CIN customization has no role to play here. role to play here.

o How does the stock transfer get the assessable value from?

This is got using the condition base value formula. For this to happen you shouldThis is got using the condition base value formula. For this to happen you should have maintained the assessable value in CIN master data. have maintained the assessable value in CIN master data.

o How do I know whether SD route or mm route is followed for stock transfer?

Page 220 of 254

Page 221: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

You need to check in SPRO – Materials Management – Purchasing – Set up StockYou need to check in SPRO – Materials Management – Purchasing – Set up Stock transport order – Assign delivery type/checking. For SD order this will be markedtransport order – Assign delivery type/checking. For SD order this will be marked ‘A’‘A’

o Based on the route followed how do I create an excise invoice?

If SD route is followed for stock transfer then you can use J1IIN to create excise invoice. If MM If SD route is followed for stock transfer then you can use J1IIN to create excise invoice. If MM route is used for creating stock transport order then you need to use J1IS for creation of Excise route is used for creating stock transport order then you need to use J1IS for creation of Excise invoiceinvoice.

o How to configure stock transport order?

Stock transport order is set up in SPRO- Materials management – Purchasing –Stock transport order is set up in SPRO- Materials management – Purchasing – Set up stock transport order. Here first you have to define the sales area and theSet up stock transport order. Here first you have to define the sales area and the default customer code. You have ato assign the order type to the checking rule.default customer code. You have ato assign the order type to the checking rule. Finally you need to maintain the delivery type for the order type. Finally you need to maintain the delivery type for the order type.

o I cannot create a proforma billing document for a replenishment delivery. What has gone wrong?Normal R3 setting does not allow a billing document to be created for a deliveryNormal R3 setting does not allow a billing document to be created for a delivery type NL. You need to change the customization settings of the item category typetype NL. You need to change the customization settings of the item category type NLN so that it becomes relevant for billing. NLN so that it becomes relevant for billing.

o When I do a receipt at the depot from my factory how do I give the excise invoice number?If the excise invoice already exists in the R3 system then in the detail screen ofIf the excise invoice already exists in the R3 system then in the detail screen of RG23D receipt you can directly enter the internal document number of the exciseRG23D receipt you can directly enter the internal document number of the excise invoice. This will automatically allow the entrie challan details to be copied. invoice. This will automatically allow the entrie challan details to be copied.

o Should I receive the full quantity at depot or transit loss is allowed?

You can receive some goods in the depot which is less than the dispatched. YouYou can receive some goods in the depot which is less than the dispatched. You have the option to enter the receipt quantity as well as the challan quantity at thehave the option to enter the receipt quantity as well as the challan quantity at the time of RG23D receipt. time of RG23D receipt.

o I want to calculate the excise duties at the time of export sales. What should I do?

There is a calculate tax button on the utilization screen of Excise invoiceThere is a calculate tax button on the utilization screen of Excise invoice creation.. This option will calculate the taxes for an export invoice. creation.. This option will calculate the taxes for an export invoice.

o Can I use my own layout for printing sales excise invoice?

Yes. If you are using your own layout then you need ot maintain this in the outputYes. If you are using your own layout then you need ot maintain this in the output determination procedure of billing documents for the output type j1i0. determination procedure of billing documents for the output type j1i0.

o Can I use my own layout for printing Excise invoice other movements?

Excise invoice other movements picks up the report layout from the output typeExcise invoice other movements picks up the report layout from the output type ZEXC which has been maintained against the SD output determination – SalesZEXC which has been maintained against the SD output determination – Sales documents. You can maintain your own layouts here and then they will be useddocuments. You can maintain your own layouts here and then they will be used for printing. for printing.

o Can I use my own layouts for register printing?

Yes you can have your own layouts. You need to maintain the same in the CINYes you can have your own layouts. You need to maintain the same in the CIN customization against the sap script form maintenance. customization against the sap script form maintenance.

o Can I change the posting date at the time of fort nightly utilization?

You can enter the posting date as per which you want the system to do the fortnightlyYou can enter the posting date as per which you want the system to do the fortnightly

posting. posting.

o Should I keep the fi/mm period open at the time of posting fort nightly utilization?

The current period alone should be open at the time of fortnightly utilization. It isThe current period alone should be open at the time of fortnightly utilization. It is also required that both MM as well as FI periods need to be open. also required that both MM as well as FI periods need to be open.

Page 221 of 254

Page 222: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

o When I run fortnightly utilization the system is showing zero balance even though there is some balance in the GL account?

The balances for utilization are picked up in CIN only when the MM period closing is done for the The balances for utilization are picked up in CIN only when the MM period closing is done for the previous period. For eg. If you r posting date is 5previous period. For eg. If you r posting date is 5thth Dec and the November period is still open Dec and the November period is still open system will show zero balance. system will show zero balance.

o Can I change the document type for the accounting document created at the time of excise invoice creation?Document type for excise invoice utilization is defined with in CIN customizationDocument type for excise invoice utilization is defined with in CIN customization at the company code level. You can use your own document type. at the company code level. You can use your own document type.

o Can I post the fort nightly utilization for individual excise invoices?

You can post the fortnightly utilization for individual invoices also. System give aYou can post the fortnightly utilization for individual invoices also. System give a message that the CENVAT utilization is already doen. But this is configurable andmessage that the CENVAT utilization is already doen. But this is configurable and could be made a warning. could be made a warning.

o Can I reverse the fortnightly utilization done?

No you cannot reverse the posting doen with fortnightly utilization. SimulateNo you cannot reverse the posting doen with fortnightly utilization. Simulate option is provided in this option for the user to check whether things are ok sooption is provided in this option for the user to check whether things are ok so that the chances of error are minimal in the actual run. that the chances of error are minimal in the actual run.

o Can I have excise rates more than 100%?

Yes you can have excise rates higher than 100% since some of the tobacco itemsYes you can have excise rates higher than 100% since some of the tobacco items carry higher excise rates. carry higher excise rates.

o How do I map the tax classification to form types?

You can maintain it along with Form type definitions in CIN IMG.You can maintain it along with Form type definitions in CIN IMG.

o Can I decide not to generate folio numbers at the time of RG23D creation?

Yes you can keep the customization option at the Excise group level blank andYes you can keep the customization option at the Excise group level blank and also you can leave the user-exit open. also you can leave the user-exit open.

o What will happen when I cancel a RG23D selection for sales already made?

If you are canceling a selection before posting then the RG23D register theIf you are canceling a selection before posting then the RG23D register the record will be removed. But if you have already done the posting then the RG23Drecord will be removed. But if you have already done the posting then the RG23D record is marked cancelled and the balance in the original invoice is inflated byrecord is marked cancelled and the balance in the original invoice is inflated by an equivalent amount. an equivalent amount.

o Why there is no transaction type for J2IU?

Transaction type is used for account determination by CIN . This is an internal entity for CIN and Transaction type is used for account determination by CIN . This is an internal entity for CIN and has no relevance to the business process. Since there is no account determination need for J2IU has no relevance to the business process. Since there is no account determination need for J2IU there is no transaction typethere is no transaction type.

o What should be my accounting entry in SD ?

For Factory SaleFor Factory Sale

During Billing DocumentDuring Billing DocumentCustomer AccountCustomer Account Dr.Dr.Sales AccountSales Account Cr.Cr.Cenvat Suspense AccountCenvat Suspense Account Cr.Cr.

During Excise Invoice CreationDuring Excise Invoice CreationCenvat Suspense AccountCenvat Suspense Account Dr.Dr.Cenvat payableCenvat payable Cr.Cr.

Page 222 of 254

Page 223: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

For TR6C ChallanFor TR6C ChallanPLA AccountPLA Account Dr.Dr.PLA on hold AccountPLA on hold Account Cr.Cr.

During Fortnightly UtilizationDuring Fortnightly UtilizationCenvat payableCenvat payable Dr.Dr.Cenvat AccountCenvat Account Cr.Cr.PLA AccountPLA Account Cr.Cr.

For Stock Transfer through SDFor Stock Transfer through SD

No Accounting entries for Performa Billing DocumentNo Accounting entries for Performa Billing Document

During Excise Invoice CreationDuring Excise Invoice CreationCenvat Suspense AccountCenvat Suspense Account Dr.Dr.Cenvat payableCenvat payable Cr.Cr.

For TR6C ChallanFor TR6C ChallanPLA AccountPLA Account Dr.Dr.PLA on hold AccountPLA on hold Account Cr.Cr.

During Fortnightly UtilizationDuring Fortnightly UtilizationCenvat payableCenvat payable Dr.Dr.Cenvat AccountCenvat Account Cr.Cr.PLA AccountPLA Account Cr.Cr.

Note: Cenvat Suspense Account should be cleared apprpiately using FI JV’s.Note: Cenvat Suspense Account should be cleared apprpiately using FI JV’s.

30.5 CIN FI

o What is the main difference between classic TDS and Extended Withholding tax (EWT)?

Classic TDS and EWT TDS refer to the two methods of handling Tax Deducted atClassic TDS and EWT TDS refer to the two methods of handling Tax Deducted at Source transactions (referred to as “Withholding tax” in SAP terminology). YouSource transactions (referred to as “Withholding tax” in SAP terminology). You may use either of these to handle your TDS related transactions. While EWTmay use either of these to handle your TDS related transactions. While EWT allows you to create the tax line both at the time of invoice receipt and payments,allows you to create the tax line both at the time of invoice receipt and payments, classic TDS allows you to create the tax line only at the time of payment. In caseclassic TDS allows you to create the tax line only at the time of payment. In case of invoices, the tax line is generated using another transaction (J1INC).of invoices, the tax line is generated using another transaction (J1INC).

o Can I have TDS on invoices as well as payments?

Yes, you can have TDS on both invoices and payments. However, you need to beYes, you can have TDS on both invoices and payments. However, you need to be using the EWT functionality to recognize TDS at the time of invoice receipt. using the EWT functionality to recognize TDS at the time of invoice receipt.

o How do I determine the TDS payment due date?

Page 223 of 254

Page 224: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

You determine the payment due date in CIN customizing. You determine the payment due date in CIN customizing.

In case you use the EWT functionality, this can be done by customizing theIn case you use the EWT functionality, this can be done by customizing the following link: J1IT following link: J1IT Tax Deducted at Source Tax Deducted at Source Extended Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Determination of Tax Due Dates Determination of Tax Due Dates Maintain Tax Due Dates for Tax Types Maintain Tax Due Dates for Tax Types

In case of the classic functionality, you may customize the following link: J1IT In case of the classic functionality, you may customize the following link: J1IT Tax Deducted at Source Tax Deducted at Source Payment Due Date Maintenance Payment Due Date Maintenance

You maintain the details of payment due dates for the TDS section and RecipientYou maintain the details of payment due dates for the TDS section and Recipient type. You may enter the number of days from the date of transaction for thetype. You may enter the number of days from the date of transaction for the section if it is meant to be maintained that way. In case the payment due date fallssection if it is meant to be maintained that way. In case the payment due date falls on the 7on the 7thth of the next month, you may enter ‘777’. of the next month, you may enter ‘777’.

o Can I have multiple TAN nos and still be able to use Classic TDS?

There are no standard customizing available in Classic TDS, the TAN No. can beThere are no standard customizing available in Classic TDS, the TAN No. can be entered during challan update and Annual Return.entered during challan update and Annual Return.

o Can I handle works contacts tax requirements using CIN?

No. CIN does not support transactions that fall under the Works Contract Act. No. CIN does not support transactions that fall under the Works Contract Act.

o Where do Vendor PAN numbers get stored in Classic and EWT?

In classic TDS, vendor PAN numbers are stored in the vendor master In classic TDS, vendor PAN numbers are stored in the vendor master extras extras texts texts

In EWT TDS, they are stored in the table J_1IMOVENDEWT under the fieldIn EWT TDS, they are stored in the table J_1IMOVENDEWT under the field J_1IPANNO in in the vendor master J_1IPANNO in in the vendor master CIN Details . CIN Details .

o How do we represent type of deductor in Annual return? (The type could be Advertiser / Contractor)

J1IT J1IT Classic Tax Deducted at Source Classic Tax Deducted at Source TDS Section - Tax Code Relationship, TDS Section - Tax Code Relationship, specify the type for taxcode & section.specify the type for taxcode & section.

o Can I Post TDS document into Special posting periods?

YesYes

o Can I modify the Certificate layout w/o altering the program?

Yes, you may change the layout of the certificate without modifying the programYes, you may change the layout of the certificate without modifying the program

o How do I put Business Place information when I am running the Customer interest post program?

The customer interest post transaction is run as a batch session. When you run theThe customer interest post transaction is run as a batch session. When you run the batch session, run it in the foreground mode and enter the business place details.batch session, run it in the foreground mode and enter the business place details.

o What are the conditions for reversing the tax at the time of downpayment clearing?

Page 224 of 254

Page 225: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

If the Invoice against which the down payment clearing has already been challanIf the Invoice against which the down payment clearing has already been challan updated (remitted the tax to govt) then it’s not possible to reverse the tax.updated (remitted the tax to govt) then it’s not possible to reverse the tax.

o What do I do when tax rates change

Classic: Classic: o With prospective effect and retrospective effect

Challan update all the old documents with the old tax rate and then, the taxcodeChallan update all the old documents with the old tax rate and then, the taxcode rate in the IMG should be changed and all the documents that are processed forrate in the IMG should be changed and all the documents that are processed for challan update will have the new tax rate.challan update will have the new tax rate.

EWT: EWT: o With prospective effect

The taxcode rate in the IMG should be changed and all the documents that areThe taxcode rate in the IMG should be changed and all the documents that are processed for challan update will have the new tax rate.processed for challan update will have the new tax rate.

o With retrospective effect

All documents for which the tax has been deducted as per the old rate has to beAll documents for which the tax has been deducted as per the old rate has to be modified using the JV (J1INJV) .modified using the JV (J1INJV) .

o Which are the Number range objects for which number ranges needs to be maintained?

TDS Certificate Printing - J_1ICERTTDS Certificate Printing - J_1ICERTInternal number range for challan – J_1ICHLNNOInternal number range for challan – J_1ICHLNNO

Page 225 of 254

Page 226: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

31User-Exits

This section gives a list of all available user-exits and how they can be used. We also give some insight into what can be done and what should not be done in the user-exit. All these user-exits have been implemented as function modules. When a new exit is added into the user-exit list the following Support pack will import the complete user-exit function group j1i7. So it is recommended that you take a back up of the j1i7 function group before importing a new Support pack.

31.1 TDS

User Exits for Classic TDS

J_1I7_USEREXIT1 - User exit in the TDS posting program - before any processing J_1I7_USEREXIT_ADDRESS - User exit to get the address and TDS circle and range J_1I7_USEREXIT_CALID - User exit to pass calid and ind to calculate the next/prev wkg

day J_1I7_USEREXIT_CERTIFICATE - User exit for Certificate layout J_1I7_USEREXIT_NUMKI - User exit for number key in certificate numbering J_1I7_USEREXIT_ONETIME_PAN - User exit for getting PAN and GIR of One time

vendor J_1I7_USEREXIT_TDS - User exit in the TDS posting program - before any processing

User Exits for EWT TDS

J_1I7_USEREXIT_BANK_ANN_RETURN - User exit to retrieve Bank details in annual returns.

J_1I7_USEREXIT_BP_MIGRATION- Derive Business Place for Migration of Down Payments

J_1I7_USEREXIT_TANNO - Userexit to get the TAN no. J_1I7_USEREXIT_CLR_MIGRATION - User Exit for Additional Clearing Documents

Program J_1IEWT_MIGRATE used in migration from classic to EWT . J_1I7_USEREXIT_DP_MIGRATION - User Exit for Migration of Down Payments

(Program J_1IEWT_MIGRATE used in migration from classic to EWT ).

31.2 SubContracting

J_1I7_USEREXIT_57F4_REVERSE - User Exit during Reversal of Subcontracting Challans

31.3 Depot

Page 226 of 254

Page 227: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

J_1I7_USEREXIT_DEPOT_BEF_SAVE - User exit after the excise header and details are written

J_1I7_USEREXIT_DEPOT_SELECTION- Userexit for changing selection of excise invoice in depot

J_1I7_USEREXIT_EXGRP_DETERM User exit for determining the excise group J_1I7_USEREXIT_EXINV_ADDL_DATA User exit for Excise Invoice Additional Data in

J1IS and J1IG J_1I7_USEREXIT_ITEM_ADDL_DATA User exit for Excise Invoice Additional Data in

J1IG J_1I7_USEREXIT_SERGRP_DETERM User exit for determining the sereis group in

Depot outbound J_1I7_USEREXIT_UNIT_CONVERSION - Unit conversion during inbound movement at

depot

31.4 Excise Invoice

J_1I7_USEREXIT_EXCISE_BEF_SAVE User exit after the excise header and details are written and they can changed in J1IS , J1IIN and Automatic creation of Excise Invoice.

J_1I7_USEREXIT_EXINV_ADDL_DATA User exit for Excise Invoice Additional Data in J1IS and J1IG

J_1I7_USEREXIT_J1I5_MATFORM User exit for J1I5 material form changes J_1I7_USEREXIT_J1I5_VALIDATE User exit for subsequent J1I5 data validation J_1I7_USEREXIT_J1IEX_BEF_SAVE User exit for J1IEX before the data is saved J_1I7_USEREXIT_J1IEX_CHANGE User exit for changing data before display J_1I7_USEREXIT_J1IS_BASE_VALUE User exit to Change base value in J1IS

Page 227 of 254

Page 228: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

32Business Transaction Events (Open-FI)

Open FI interface is an enhancement methodology given by SAP that can be used for ADD-on or customer developments. In this architecture there are two kinds of business transaction interfaces: one is to publish data from the actual transaction so that an additional component can trigger further actions (Publish&Subscribe Interfaces). The other kind of interfaces is provided to allow substituting processes in standard transactions (Process Interfaces). One precaution for using this is that there can be multiple functions attached to a single event. The individual entries can be called at random and so there should not be any dependency on any other entry.

If you want to use the Publish&Subcribe Interfaces and the Process Interfaces included in the SAP Standard System, you access the Implementation Guide (IMG) and follow the menu path Financial Accounting -> Financial Accounting Global Settings -> Use Open Interfaces (or choose transaction fibf). It is there that all customizing settings for the use of business transaction events are made.

Add-Ons such as ‘CIN’ or your own function modules or products by an external Software Vendor are linked to the R/3 System as follows:

1. You identify which interfaces the R/3 System offers:

To do this in the customizing activitiy Use Open Interfaces choose Environment -> Infosystem (P/S) or Environment -> Infosystem (Processes) and enter „A“ as the attribute type.

You can also select:

Which events are found in different SAP Application Components

A certain number of events by entering intervals

Which interfaces are used in active products

Which interfaces are used within a certain country version or a certain industry solution

Which interfaces are used within a particular customer product

If you run the program, you see a list of all events you have at your disposal:

2. You enter the name of the product.

To do this in the customizing activitiy Use Open Interfaces choose Settings -> Products of a customer. A product consists of a number of function modules, which can be called up from different points in a program (business transaction events) from the R/3 Standard System.

A product can also be an external software component.

If the product is in an external system, you must enter an RFC-Destination. If the product is in the same system, you do not need to make an entry.

Activate the product in step 5.

3. You enter your own function module.

To do this in the customizing activitiy Use Open Interfaces choose Settings -> P/S-Function Module of customer or Process-Function Module of customer.

Enter the following data:

The key of the interface

Name of the product

Page 228 of 254

Page 229: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

The function module to be assigned to the product

You can assign several function modules to a product.

Caution: The function module must lie within the customer name range. It must begin with the letter Z.

Leave the fields for country and application blank, unless you want to enhance or replace a particular country version or SAP industry solution instead of the Standard System process.

4. You enter the source text of the function module and activate it.

To do this in the customizing activitiy Use Open Interfaces choose Environment -> Infosystem (P/S) or Environment ->Info system (Process) and run the program.Proceed as follows:

Doubleclick twice on the event or the process you want to use. If you want to have a look at the interface, choose Goto -> Interface. Then choose Back.

Put the cursor on the interface key and choose Goto -> Function Library. You should now see the sample function module included in the SAP Standard System.

Copy the sample function module in the customer name range giving the function module the same name as you gave the function module in step 3.

Enter the source text in the empty function module. Activate the function module.

5. You must now activate the product by choosing Settings -> Products of a customer.

Run the R/3 program and check whether the function module is called up.

This prodecure also applies to partner and SAP-Industry Solution Add-Ons, which must first be entered into the system by choosing Settings -> Identification -> SAP-Applications or Partners.

For Country India Version (CIN) the partner Id has been defirned as ‘INDIA’.

The products are maintained by choosing Settings -> Prodcuts -> of a Partner -> Edit.

The follwing entries should exist for CIN

Product Partner

CIN INDIA

EWT INDIA

TS INDIA

Check whether these are active by choosing Settings -> Prodcuts -> of a Partner -> Activate

If any of the above is missing make an entry.

32.1 Publish/Subscribe interfaces

Event Partner Product No Country Function Module

00001030 INDIA EWT 0 IN J_1IEWT_CHALLAN_UPDATE

00001030 INDIA TS 0 IN J_1I6_SERVICE_TAX_UPDATE

00001050 INDIA CIN 0 IN J_1I4A_SAVE_EXCISE_BELNR

Page 229 of 254

Page 230: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

00001050 INDIA TS 0 IN J_1ITDS_TABLE_UPDATE_LIV

00001110 INDIA TS 0 IN J_1ITDS_SAVE_CHANGES

o Event 1030 gets triggered during saving of any fi documento Event 1050 gets triggered during the accounting interface of FI postingo Event 1101 gets triggered when a FI document is changed and saved

Most events have the following character:The standard process provides information about the current status (only of the export), and an add-on reacts by sending either an error or warning message.

32.2 Process Interfaces

Event Country Appl Function Partner Product

00001120 IN J_1IEWT_DUEDATE INDIA EWT

This event gets triggered at the time of Document posting allowing field substitution of header and item. The CIN function calculates the payment due date based on customizing and updates bseg_valut with the new due date.

When you reach a process interface, data record D1, relevant for later database contents are available for you to use. A standard process (for example, selecting a house bank) changes this data record to record D2 in accordance with certain rules. Using a process interface, it is possible to replace the D1->D2 assignment (the process under consideration) with an alternative process, meaning that you assign record D3 to data D1 (in the example: Determine the house bank using different rules).

THE STANDARD PROCESS CAN ONLY BE REPLACED BY A MAXIMUM OF ONE ADD-ON

If there is a choice between several add-ons, the add-on to be used is selected as follows: If the customer wants the system to refer to his/her add-on, his module is executed. If not, a partner entry is executed if one exists. If there is no partner entry available, the system searches for an entry in the industry table. The standard process is only executed if the system finds nothing in the industry table. In addition, each instance (client, partner, or industry) can only make a maximum of one entry in its table.

Page 230 of 254

Page 231: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

33Customization

33.1 Pre Delivered R3 customization

Some of the standard customizing is delivered along with CIN. For a fresh installation please run the transaction O035 before you start the customization process. For this to work your client should have a copy of the client 000 customization which came along with the CIN CD. The country install will do a template customization for company code ‘0001’ which can be used for your productive company code.

33.1.1 SCM

33.1.1.1 MM On the MM side there are no predelivered customizing other than the pricing procedures.

33.1.1.2 SD Output Determination:

In Standard Customizing for output determination following settings have to be maintained.

Output determination procedure has to be maintained against the Billing type. Create an output type and maintain the Driver program, Form routine and the layout. Driver program is the name of the program that the system calls up to process the output. Form routine is the name of routine to be called up in the processing program. Layout is the name of a Sapscript layout set that can be designed as per user requirement. To enable printing of particular document for partner function, maintain the desired partner function against the output type. Printer communication details can be maintained by creating condition records where partner functions can be assigned to output types.

Output type J1I0 is used for sales excise invoice printing. This is available in client 000. this is included in the output determination procedure V10000. You have to maintain the condition records for the output type for each sold to party.

Copy Control from delivery to Billing

(i) When excise and commercial invoice are the same

The copy control path is OR --> LF --> F2

When excise and commercial invoice are different, i.e. Multiple excise invoices for a single commercial invoice

The copy control path is OR-JF-JEX -F2

To Maintain copy control for billing documents

Page 231 of 254

Page 232: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Path: IMG Sales and Distribution Billing Billing documents Maintain copying control for billing documents.

1. Maintain the following entries for Billing type F2 and Delivery type JF at item level

o Item Category TAN

o Copying requirements 310o Data VBRK/VBRP 351

2. Maintain the following entries for Billing type JEX and delivery type JF at item levelo Item Category TANo Copying requirements 311o Data VBRK/VBRP 351

To check / change formula 310 & 311

VOFM --> Copying requirements --> Billing document --> Choose Formula (Source Text)

To check / change formula 351

VOFM --> Data transfer --> Billing document --> Choose Formula (Source Text)

Formula 310:

The routine is to be attached to the copying requirement in LF to F2 copy control for TAN item category. This is to be used when the proforma invoice is used as reference for the excise invoice. ie. the procedure in sales is

SO -> LF -> JEX -> excise posting by J1II -> F2

The added functionality of this routine ensures that the excise posting takes place before the billing document is created. In case of depot sale it ensures that the excise invoice selection has taken place before the billing document is created.

Formula 311:

The additional check done in this routine is that post goods issue is done for the delivery document and it also prevents multiple creation of the billing/pro forma document to which this formula is attached multiple times for the same delivery item.

Data transfer - Billing documents:

This routine splits the items of a delivery into multiple billing/ proforma documents. The split is based on the following fields: Distribution channel, division, delivery, chapter id and also the maximum number of items in a document is picked up from the customization and imposed on the document being created

33.1.2 FinancialsSTANDARD CUSTOMIZING

1. Standard Customizing: Classic TDSa. Tax codes: (Example W1 for India) b. Accounts for withholding tax: For Chart of Accounts ‘INT’

2. Standard Customizing: EWT TDSa. Recipient types b. Tax Typesc. Tax Codes

Page 232 of 254

Page 233: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

3. Standard Customizing: Asset Accounting for Indiaa. Chart of depreciation 0IN b. Period control methods IT and NL for India Tax requirementsc. Depreciation keys for India: In1 to IN9

Page 233 of 254

Page 234: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

CIN CUSTOMIZING

1. CIN Customizing: Classic TDS: No customizing provided

2. CIN Customizing: EWT TDS i. Business Place: IN01 – IN03

Page 234 of 254

Page 235: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

34Pricing

34.1 CIN Pricing

CIN delivers one tax procedure that can be used universally for India. 4 SD pricing procedures and 1 MM procedure are also provided.

Tax procedure - TAXINJ

Step CTyp From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy Description

100 BASB       362   Base Amount

110   100     X 352   Calculated Call

120       X   Sub total

200 JMO1 120       354   IN: A/P BED setoff

205 JAO1 120       364   IN: A/P AED setoff

207 JSO1 120       368   IN: A/P BED setoff

210 JMO2 120       362 NVV IN: A/P BED setoff

212 JAO2 120       365 NVV IN A/P AED inventory

214 JSO2 120       369 NVV IN: A/P BED setoff

215   100 214     X   BASE+all duties

217 JIP3 215       370 363 NVV IN Sales tax setoff

220 JIP1 215       363 NVV IN C Sales tax inv.

230 JIP2 215       371 363 NVV IN L Sales tax inv.

250 JSER 100       ESA IN: Service tax cred

260 JSVD 250       ESE IN: Service tax debi

510 JMOD 120     X 363   IN: A/R BED

512 JAED 120     X 366   IN: A/R AED

513 JSED 120     X 360   IN: A/R SED

514 JCES 120     X 367   IN: A/R Cess

515       X   sub total

520 JIN1 515       MWS IN: A/R CST

530 JIN2 515       MW3 IN: AR LST

540 JIN4 520 520       MWS IN: A/R CST Surcharg

550 JIN5 530 530       MW3 IN: AR LST Surcharg

Page 235 of 254

Page 236: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

The standard procedure with all excise conditions and Sales conditions is pre delivered. All tax calculations happen within TAXINJ. From the pricing procedure the net price gets transferred to the BASB condition of tax procedure. A/R Excise duty conditions are statistical in TAXINJ. These get copied to the SD pricing procedure and get posted from there. From release 46C it is mandatory that all tax conditions of the tax procedure be available in SD pricing also. The posting for the A/P excise duty as well as Sales taxes in both input and output happens from the FI tax procedure.

Consequently during incoming cycle, all restrictions for a tax apply to Excise duty also.

The determination of sales tax rate is using tax codes only. So you need to have as many tax codes as the number of taxes. Even when the rate for a tax code changes you should not delete the tax codes since this can create problems for the old documents. So rate changes have to be addressed by maintaining separate tax codes.

SD pricing

CIN come s pre delivered with 4 pricing procedures for Indian customers.

You need to define the same condition types in the FI taxes as well as SD pricing. But at the same time we need new set of condition types which have been configured as discount surcharge conditions.

Thre pre delivered condition types are as follows

JAED A/R Add. Excise duty Taxes Percentage

JCED A/R Cess Discount or surcharge Percentage

JCES A/R Cess Taxes Percentage

JEX2 A/R Basic Excise Discount or surcharge Percentage

JEXA A/R AED Discount or surcharge Percentage

JEXS A/R sED Discount or surcharge Percentage

JFCG Free - 100% discount Discount or surcharge Percentage

JFRE Frieght India Discount or surcharge Gross weight

JHAC Handling charges Discount or surcharge Quantity

JIN1 Central sales tax Taxes Percentage

JIN2 Local sales tax Taxes Percentage

JIN4 CST surcharge Taxes Percentage

JIN5 LST surcharge Taxes Percentage

JINS Insurance (India) Discount or surcharge Percentage

JMAN Manual Excise Taxes Percentage

JMOD A/R Basic Excise Taxes Percentage

JOC1 Octroi accural Discount or surcharge Percentage

JOC2 Octroi Discount or surcharge Percentage

Page 236 of 254

Page 237: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

JSED A/R Special Exc.duty Taxes Percentage

JTRD Trade discount Discount or surcharge Percentage

JTX1 Tax class 2 Taxes Percentage

JTX2 Tax class 3 Taxes Percentage

JTX3 Tax class 4 Taxes Percentage

CIN also give 2 standard access sequences. JIND is used for accessing condition UTXJ.

This condition is used for determining the tax code. JDUM is the access sequence that is used for excise condition types.

JFACT is a template of pricing procedure for Sales from Factory. JMAN is a manual condition for Excise. When manual override is required for the calculated excise value it could be given for the condition JMAN. The condition value formula 355 checks and copies this on to the Basic Excise duty value. UTXJ is the condition in JFACT which triggers the calculated call of tax procedure TAXINJ. Condition records need to be maintained for UTXJ with the appropriate tax code. Access sequence JIND has been assigned to the condition UTXJ. Base value for calculation of excise derived from the condition base value formula 351. This ensures that if an assessable value is maintained for the material through Excise rate maintenance (J1ID) then that will be used as basis for excise calculation. In the absence of an assessable value the selling price will be used for excise calculation.

JMOD is a FI Tax condition which gets the Basic Excise duty from calculation formula 352. JEX2 is a copy of JMOD and is a Sales pricing condition. The value of JEX2 gets posted for Excise account key. This ensures that the cost accounting of excise value paid is done correctly. In cases where commercial invoice is created after utilization the condition value formula 353 ensures that the actual CENVAT utilized is accounted as excise. Similarly JAED is a FI Tax condition which gets the Additional Excise duty from calculation formula 352. JEXA is a copy of JAED and is a Sales pricing condition. The accounting is done for the value of JEXA. JSED is a FI Tax condition which gets the Special Excise duty from calculation formula 352. JEXS is a copy of JSED and is a Sales pricing condition. The accounting is done for the value of JEXS. JCES is a FI Tax condition which gets the CESS from calculation formula 352. JCED is a copy of JCES and is a Sales pricing condition. The accounting is done for the value of JCED.

Sales Tax - Identification of Central or Local Sales tax.

Both CST and LST rates can be maintained in one tax code in the same jurisdiction. (Refer Tax code V8 ). The rates are maintained at the tax code level. But then the formula 352 eliminates one of them based on the region of ship-to party and region of delivering plant. You can also have separate tax codes for LST and CST.

Step CTyp From To Man. SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy Print Mdt Description

100 PR00   1   ERL X X Price

200 JMAN 100 190     X   X   Manual Excise

300 UTXJ 100 190     X 352 351       Tax Jurisdict.Code

Page 237 of 254

Page 238: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

350 JMOD 200 X D X 355       A/R Basic Excise

375   100 190     X       Base Prices

400 JEX2 350   2   353 EXD X   A/R Basic Excise

450 JAED 100 190 X G X 366       A/R Add. Excise duty

475   375 400     X       Base prices + BED

500 JEXA 450   5   353 EXD X   A/R AED

520 JSED 100 190 X F X 360       A/R Special Exc.duty

525   475 500     X       Base Price + BED + AED

540 JEXS 520   4   353 EXD X   A/R sED

550 JCES 100 190 X H X 367       A/R Cess

575   525 540     X       Base Price +BED+AED+SED

600 JCED 550   6   353 EXD X   A/R Cess

625   575 600     X       Base Price+ BED+AED+SED+Cess

700 JTRD 625       ERS X   Trade discount

720 JIN1 625 X   X   X   Central sales tax

740 JIN2 625 X   X   X   Local sales tax

760 JIN4 625 X   X   X   CST surcharge

775   625 770     X       Base Price+Excise+ST+Discount

780 JOC2 775 X     ERF X   Octroi

790   625 700     X       Base Price+Excise+Discount

800 JFCG 780 790     X   X   Free - 100% discount

Export Sales Pricing Procedure - JEXPOR

There is no Excise condition in the Exports pricing. But excise can be calculated at MODVAT utilization.

Step CTyp From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy Print Mdt Description

100 PR00   1   ERL X X Price

500 UTXJ 100 200   010     352       Tax Jurisdict.Code

600 JFRE       ERF X   Frieght India

700 JINS       ERF X   Insurance (India)

Depot Pricing Procedure - JDEPOT

Depot pricing procedure is exactly similar to the Factory pricing procedure with the exception that the condition value formula attached to the excise condition is 356. This ensures that the excise

Page 238 of 254

Page 239: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

value from the referred excise invoices for the delivery is picked up and used by the commercial invoice.

Step CTyp From To Man. SubTo Stat AltCTy ActKy Print Mdt Description

100 PR00   1   ERL X X Price

200 JMAN 100 190 X   X   X   Manual Excise

300 UTXJ 100 190       352       Tax Jurisdict.Code

350 JMOD 200 X D X 355       A/R Basic Excise

375   100 190     X       Base Prices

400 JEX2 350   2   356 EXD X   A/R Basic Excise

450 JAED 100 190 X G X 366       A/R Add. Excise duty

475   375 400     X       Base prices + BED

500 JEXA 450   5   356 EXD X   A/R AED

520 JSED 100 190 X F X 360       A/R Special Exc.duty

525   475 500     X       Base Price + BED + AED

540 JEXS 520   4   356 EXD X   A/R sED

550 JCES 100 190 X H X 367       A/R Cess

575   525 540     X       Base Price +BED+AED+SED

600 JCED 550   6   EXD X   A/R Cess

625   575 600     X       Base Price+ BED+AED+SED+Cess

700 JTRD 625       ERS X   Trade discount

720 JIN1 625 X   X   X   Central sales tax

740 JIN2 625 X   X   X   Local sales tax

760 JIN4 625 X   X   X   CST surcharge

775   625 770     X       Base Price+Excise+ST+Discount

780 JOC2 775 X     ERF X   Octroi

790   625 700     X       Base Price+Excise+Discount

800 JFCG 780 790 X   X   X   Free - 100% discount

Stock Transfer Pricing Procedure - JSTKTR

Stock transfer pricing has only excise conditions as it is used only for the calculation of excise value.

Page 239 of 254

Page 240: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Step CTyp From To Man. SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy Print Mdt Description

100 PR00   1   ERL X X Price

200 JMAN 100 190 X   X   X   Manual Excise

300 UTXJ 100 190       352 351       Tax Jurisdict.Code

350 JMOD 200 X D X 355       A/R Basic Excise

375   100 190     X       Base Prices

400 JEX2 350   2 X 356   X   A/R Basic Excise

450 JAED 100 190 X G X 366       A/R Add. Excise duty

475   375 400     X       Base prices + BED

500 JEXA 450   5 X 353   X   A/R AED

520 JSED 100 190 X F X 360       A/R Special Exc.duty

525   475 500     X       Base Price + BED + AED

540 JEXS 520   4 X 353   X   A/R sED

550 JCES 100 190 X H X 367       A/R Cess

575   525 540     X       Base Price +BED+AED+SED

600 JCED 550   6 X   X   A/R Cess

625   575 600     X       Base Price+ BED+AED+SED+Cess

780 JOC1 625       ERF X   Octroi accural

MM Pricing

CIN provides a customized procedure for import processing J_IMPStep Cntr CTyp From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat Accrls Print Description

001 01 P000   1     X Gross Price

001 02 P001   005 1     X Gross Price

005 00   001 002   9       Gross value

010 01 R000 001 X       X Discount % on Gross

010 02 R001 X       X Discount/Quantity

010 03 R002 X       X Absolute discount

010 04 KR00 X       X Header Disc.(Value)

010 05 K000         X Contrct HeaderDisc %

010 06 R003 X       X Discount % on Net

016 00           X Net incl. disc.

017 00 JEXC   5 X     Manual Excise Value

019 00   016         X Net incl. disc.- 2

Page 240 of 254

Page 241: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

021 01 NAVS 019     X     Non-Deductible Tax

022 00   019 021   3       Net incl. tax

024 00 JCDB 022       FR3 X Basic customs duty

025 00 JCV1 022 024   `     FR3 X CVD Percentage

026 00 JCDS 022 025       FR3 X Special customs duty

028 00 FRB1       FR1 X Freight (Value)

035 01 SKTO 019   017   X     Cash Discount

040 00     2       Actual Value

070 00 GRWR 019   008 C X     Statistical Value

All the customs duty conditions have been configured as delivery cost conditions with separate accounting keys.

34.2 CIN Formulae

34.2.1.1 CONDITION BASE VALUE

Formula Where is it When is it called

What does it do

351 SD pricing procedure

SO, Billing (once for each item]

Checks if assessable value or NDP is maintained for the item in CIN

Set Assessable value or NDP in that sequence as the base value

361 MM pricing procedure

PO, IV if delivery cost exists [once for each item]

Calls the function J_1I4_GET_DEDUC_TAX_FOR_OCTROI

[This function takes the condition value of NAVS plus the globally stored setoff value.

Setoff value = deductible BED + AED + SED + sales-tax setoff]

362 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

To be used only if you need second Base Value

Gets the value stored in sub-total6 if item no exists If Invoice verification is being done, then gets sub-total6 if

plant is depot. If tax type is input then base value = base value – sub-total6

363 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

To be used only if you need Second Base Value and has to be used along with Formula 362

Get the value stored in sub-total6 if item no exists If tax type is input then base value = base value + sub-total6

34.2.1.2 CONDITION VALUE

Page 241 of 254

Page 242: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

Formula Where is it

When is it called

What does it do

351 FI tax procedure

Obsolete Should not be used in CIN. Substituted by 352

352 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code BED setoff j_1itaxam1 BED inv. j_1itaxam2 BED Sales j_1itaxam3 AED set off j_1itaxam4 AED inv. j_1itaxam5 AED Sales j_1itaxam6 Cess - j_1itaxam7 SED set off j_1itaxam8 SED inv. j_1itaxam9 SED Sales j_1itaxam0

If ERS (tcode – MRRS) get item info calling j_1i4a_get_ers_data Calculates exceptional duty using

J_1I6_CALCULATE_EXCP_EXCISE Check exceptions for SD based on tax classification. Uses

mapping of tax classification to get the form type If no exemption and material code is enetered, calls

J_1I6_DETERMINE_EXCISE_RATE to calculate duty If input tax then call J_1I4_GET_MANUAL_EXCISE as well as J_1I4_GET_EXCISE_AT_IV to get changes Check if AED and SED are applicable and default values Store the calculated values in structure j_1itaxvar Based on input-output determination decide whether setoff or

inventory by checking if the o/p material has AED or SED If output tax eliminate CST or LST based on the region of ship-

to-party and region of delivering plant Call J_1I4_STORE_DED_TAX_FOR_OCTROI for storing base

value for octroi Based on customization round off the duty

353 SD pricing procedure

SO and Billing

If Billing get the excise invoice value from CIN data based on delivery document and item

354 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

Read value from j_1itaxvar-taxam1 If partial credit indicator is set assign value only based on tax

code % If MRHR call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_iv If MIRO call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_liv

355 SD pricing procedure

SO and Billing

Get base value from condition UTXJIf Manual excise condition JMAN exists copy the value or else copy j_!itaxvar-taxam3

356 SD pricing procedure

SO and Billing

Valid only for billing Read RG23D table for the given delivery and item Sum all the serial no lines for a given delivery no and item to

give excise value (there co uld be multiple RG23D serial nos for a given item)

357 SD pricing SO and Billing

If sales order copy j_1itaxam3 If billing, then check whether any excise lines exists for the

delivery and item. If so get the duty from CIN excise data.

358 SD pricing SO and Billing

If sales order copy j_1itaxam6 If billing, then check whether any excise lines exists for the

delivery and item. If so get the duty from CIN excise data.

359 SD pricing SO and If sales order copy j_1itaxam7

Page 242 of 254

Page 243: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

billing If billing, then check whether any excise lines exists for the delivery and item. If so get the duty from excise detail.

360 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

Copy j_1itaxvar-taxam0

361 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

Copy j_1itaxvar-taxam1

362 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

(Gets A/P BED inventory)

Read value from j_1itaxvar-taxam2 If partial credit indicator is set assign value only based on tax

code % If total tax rate > 100% give error Call j_1i4_ded_exc_inv_for_octroi If MRHR call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_iv If MIRO call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_liv

363 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

Copy j_1itaxvar-taxam3

364 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

Get registration id Read value from j_1itaxvar-taxam4 If partial credit indicator is set assign value only based on tax

code % If MRHR call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_iv If MIRO call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_liv

365 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

(AED Inventory)

Get registration id Read value from j_1itaxvar-taxam2 If partial credit indicator is set assign value only based on tax

code % If total tax rate > 100% give error Call j_1i4_ded_exc_inv_for_octroi If MRHR call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_iv If MIRO call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_liv

366 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

Copy j_1itaxvar-taxam6

367 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

Copy j_1itaxvar-taxam7

368 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

Read value from j_1itaxvar-taxam4 If partial credit indicator is set assign value only based on tax

code % If MRHR call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_iv If MIRO call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_liv

369 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

Read value from j_1itaxvar-taxam9 If partial credit indicator is set assign value only based on tax

code % If total tax rate > 100% give error Call j_1i4_ded_exc_inv_for_octroi If MRHR call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_iv

If MIRO call j_1i4_get_actual_duty_in_liv

370 FI tax All txns Picks the setoff rate from j_1istrate

Page 243 of 254

Page 244: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

procedure with tax code

Call J_1I4_ADD_ST_SETOFF_FOR_OCTROI

371 FI tax procedure

All txns with tax code

If setoff is maintained then recalculate the ST rate

34.2.1.3 DATA TRANSFER

Formula Where is it When is it called

What does it do

351 Copy delivery to Billing in data transfer routine for required item categories

Creation of billing

Get regid for the delivering plant Get no of items from regid customizing Get the chapter-id for the material Enhance ‘ZUK’ structure for splitting with 2 and 3

above

34.2.1.4 COPYING REQUIREMENTSFormula Where is it When is it

calledWhat does it do

310 Copy delivery to Billing in copy rules for required item categories

Creation of billing

Factory – Ensure that J1II is done after JEX before F2

Check for chapter-id and only then proceed If proforma document continue. If invoice then get proforma document Check if the document type is the CIN reference Check for excise invoice for the proforma

billingDepot – Ensure that J1IJ is done before F2

Check in RG23D for the delivery document. Proceed only if it exists

311 Copy delivery to Billing in copy rules for required item categories

Creation of billing

Relevant only for factory- Ensures that GI is done before – JEX (Proforma billing). Stops multiple JEX from being created

Check if PGI is done and give error Check in VBFA whether proforma documents

already exist and give error

(Proforma document- doc type from CIN customizing)

Page 244 of 254

Page 245: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

35Configurable Messages

Some of the messages in CIN are configurable. This means that you can decide whether it should be a warning or an error. A message does not become configurable automatically. It should have been provided for already. It is possible that the same message is being used by multiple transactions. So you can configure only for a particular transaction. You can also configure for a particular user.

Application

Area

Message

No TCode User

Message

Type

4F 122     W

4F 153     E

4F 167     E

4F 168     W

4F 176     E

4F 180     W

4F 181     W

4F 194     W

8I 103 J1IIN   W

8I 184     W

8I 257 J1IFN W

8I 295 J1IB W

8I 312 J2IU   W

8I 339 J1IIN   W

8i 448 J1IH W

8I 464 J1IA W

8I 477 W

8I 478 MIRO   E

8I 542  J1IA   W

8I 560 J1IA W

8I 570 W

8I 575     W

8I 576     W

8I 577     W

8I 595 J1IS W

8I 606 J2IU W

8I 607 J2IU W

Page 245 of 254

Page 246: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

8I 628 W

8I 634 J1IIN   W

8I 640 J1IS W

8I 652 J1II W

8I 695 J1IG W

8I 894 J1IJ W

Page 246 of 254

Page 247: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

36CIN Transaction Data

J_1IEXCHDRExcise data is stored as header and detail. All documents relevant for excise are generated with a unique internal number irrespective of the transaction type, company code or plant. This is used only for internal purposes only. The Excise data is stored in Excise header (J_1IEXCHDR). The excise group maintained in the excise header is used as the entity for reporting and all duty debit purposes. The status of the document is recorded in the header status. . The vendor excise number or alternatively factory-generated number is stored in these tables

J_1IEXCDTLThis contains the detail data at line item level for a given excise invoice. For each header record normally there is a detail records except under one situation. When an excise JV is created by filling only the amount with out any item data then there is no detail record. This carries the reference documents from which the excise invoice is created except for the incoming invoice.

J_1IGRXREFWhen there are multiple/single Goods receipts for the same excise invoice the cross references are stored in J_1IGRXREF. This table is relevant only for the incoming excise invoices under transaction type ‘GRPO’.

J_1IGRXSUB

All the Subcontracting challan that are referred in the GR / Migo Popup and reconciled later are captured in this table.

J_1IPART1All the stock receipts and issues that are relevant for reporting are captured in this. Part1 number gets generated based on the number range object j_1irg23a1 or j_1irg23C1 based on whether it is an input or capital goods. You can create entries automatically at the time of receipt transactions. Alternatively you can run a report and create entries here.

J_1IPART2This is table contains the value details for CENVAT credit. The entries here can be of 4 types. RG23A, RG23C, PLA or Despatch register. Despatch register entries gets created only at the time of outgoing excise invoice creation. R23A, RG23C and PLA entries get generated based on the register into which the debit needs to take place.

J_1IRG1RG1 entries are created here. The number range used for generation of unique number is J_1IRG1.

Page 247 of 254

Page 248: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

J_1IRGSUMThis table keeps the cumulative receipts and cumulative issues for a material and excise group.

J_1IRG23DThe receipts and issues into RG23D is recorded into this table. The receipts have the reference of the material document from which it was created. Folio number is generated from the number range J_1IRG23D. A new folio number is generated for each line of Goods receipt. Serial numbers are generated by simpy incrementing the last number. Folio and serial numbers are generated only if the customization is set for the same. Depot invoice number is generated from the number range J_1IDEPINV. This is generated only at the time of posting of the RG23D selection.

J_1ITDSThis is the reference table for Classic TDS transactions. In this table the TDS related entries get locked for Classic TDS. When ever a document relevant for TDS deduction gets triggered in R3 an entry is put into this table. When TDS posting is done all entries that are not yet posted are picked up from here and processed. The status is then updated in this table.

Page 248 of 254

Page 249: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

37Security

The list of authorization objects used with in CIN are as attached.

J_1IEXC_JV Authorization object for Excise JV transaction

J_1IEWPOVP Authorization object for Excise without PO – Verify

J_1IFAC_SL Authorization object for Factory sales transaction

J_1IUTZLTN Authorization object for Fortnightly payment

J_1IFRTPYM Authorization object for Fortnightly payment transaction

J_1I_IMG Authorization object for IMG

J_1IEXC_OT Authorization object for Other Excise Invoice Create

J_1IPLA_FC Authorization object for PLA forecast

J_1IREGS Authorization object for RG23 issues and RG1

J_1IARE_ME Authorization object for area menu transaction

J_1ICAP_GD Authorization object for capital goods transaction

J_1IDEP_SL Authorization object for depot sale transaction

J_1IEXC_IV Authorization object for excise invoice posting transaction

J_1IREGEXT Authorization object for excise registers extraction

J_1IEXC_RT Authorization object for maintain excise rate transaction

J_1IEXPRN Authorization object for printing excise invoice

J_1IUTZL Autorization object for Fortnightly payment

J_1IEX_PST Autorization object for posting Other Excise invoice

J_1IFAC_S1 Enhanced Factory sales authorization

J_1IIEXCP Exceptions for sales Excise invoices

J_1IEXCJV1 Excise Invoice

J_1IEWPOCR Excise invoice without PO create

J_1ICWIZ Health Check

J_1IINEX Incoming Excise Invoice

J_1IFACSL1 Out going excise invoice - authorizations

J_1IFACT1 Out going excise invoice - authorizations

Page 249 of 254

Page 250: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

CIN FI - Authorization objects:

Auth. Object Description

Classic TDS  

   

J_1ITDSCHL Authorization for TDS Challan

J_1ITDSCER Authorization check for Certificate Print Program

J_1ITDS Authorization object for TDS transaction J1IN

J_1ITAX_DS Authorization object for tax deduction at source transaction

   

EWT TDS  

   

J_1IEWT_AR Authorisation Object for Annual Returns - Ext. With. Tax

J_1IEWTMIS Authorisation for MIS Report

J_1IEWTCHL Authorization Object for Challan Updation-EWT

J_1IEWTCER Authorization check for Certificate Printing- EWT

J_1IEWTJV Authorization check for JV

J_1IEWTPR Authorization check for SR/IR Provisions- EWT

J_1ITDSARC TDS Archiving

J_1IEWT_HC Health check for Migration to EWT

From 46B onwards it is not required to know the exact objects for authorization. You can build the roles menus using the given transactions or by copying existing CIN roles. Once the role is finalized you can generate an authorization profile from this. This profile can be edited at the customer site to modify the authorization values which you want to provide. Finally this can be attached to the user masters.

.

37.1 Roles

37.1.1 Master Roles

SAP_CIN - This role covers all of the tasks associated with Country Version India (CIN), including Customizing, day-to-day operations, and reporting.

SAP_CIN_SUPER_USER - This role covers all the Customizing activities relating to Country Version India (CIN), in all applications. It also covers the maintenance of excise master data.

Page 250 of 254

Page 251: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

37.1.2 CIN MM Roles

SAP_CIN_MM_MANAGER - This role covers all administrative tasks in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to excise duty in the areas of procurement and subcontracting. It includes Customizing activities; all day-to-day operations; and reporting.

In Customizing and master data, the Excise Manager is authorized to:

o Work with the CIN Implementation Guide (IMG) o Use the health check tool o Define number ranges for excise invoices o Maintain excise master data o Make retrospective price amendments

This role will also allow

o Capture, change, display, post, and cancel incoming excise invoices o Capture excise invoices at depots o Complete subcontracting challans and perform quantity reconciliation o Post excise invoice journal vouchers o Track formso Create the excise registers o Transfer outstanding CENVAT credit on capital goods to the appropriate CENVAT

accounts

SAP_CIN_MM_SUPERVISOR - This role covers most of the tasks in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to excise duty in the areas of procurement and subcontracting. It includes all day-to-day operations and reporting, but only one Customizing activity.

In Customizing and master data, the Excise Supervisor is authorized to:

o Define number ranges for excise invoices o Maintain excise master data o Make retrospective price amendments

In day-to-day operations, this role allows you to:

o Capture, change, display, post, and cancel incoming excise invoices o Capture excise invoices at depots o Execute all activities relating to subcontracting challans o Post excise invoice journal vouchers o Track formso The Excise Supervisor can:o Create the excise registers o Transfer outstanding CENVAT credit on capital goods to the appropriate CENVAT

accounts

SAP_CIN_MM_CLERK - This role covers the tasks relating to capturing incoming excise invoices.

The Excise Clerk can:

o Capture excise invoices (of all types) o Track forms

SAP_CIN_SUBCONTRACTING_CLERK - The Subcontracting Clerk is authorized to create, change, and display subcontracting challans.

Page 251 of 254

Page 252: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

37.1.3 CIN SD Roles

SAP_CIN_SD_MANAGER - This role covers the administrative tasks in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to excise duty in the area of sales. It includes all Customizing activities; day-to-day operations; and reporting.

In Customizing and master data, the Excise Manager is authorized to:

o Work with the CIN Implementation Guide (IMG) o Use the health check tool o Maintain excise master data o Make retrospective price amendments

In day-to-day operations, this role allows you to:

o Create and verify outgoing excise invoices for other movements o Create excise invoices in batches o Post excise journal vouchers o Print excise invoices o Track forms

In reporting, this role also allows you to:

o Remit excise duty using the fortnightly utilization program o Print 57AE returns

SAP_CIN_SD_SUPERVISOR - This role covers the tasks in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to excise duty in the sales area. It includes the maintenance of master data; day-to-day operations; and reporting. It does not, however, include Customizing.

In master data, the Excise Supervisor is authorized to:

o Maintain excise master data o Make retrospective price amendments

In day-to-day operations, this role allows you to:

o Create and verify outgoing excise invoices for other movements o Create excise invoices in batches o Post excise journal vouchers o Print excise invoices o Track forms

In reporting, this role also allows you to:

o Remit excise duty using the fortnightly utilization program o Print 57AE returns

SAP_CIN_SD_CLERK - This role covers the tasks relating to the creation of excise invoices.

The Excise Clerk can:

o Create excise invoices for other movements o Print excise invoices o Track forms

SAP_CIN_REGISTER_CLERK - This role covers all the activities relating to the preparation of excise and sales tax registers.

Page 252 of 254

Page 253: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

37.1.4 CIN FI Roles

SAP_CIN_TDS_MANAGER - This role covers all the activities in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to tax deducted at source (TDS). It includes all Customizing activities, day-to-day operations, and reporting.

In Customizing, the TDS Manager is authorized to:

o Work with the CIN Implementation Guide (IMG) o Use the health check tool

In day-to-day operations, you can:

o Carry out all the activities relating to the remittance of tax withholdings o Make adjustment postings o Print and cancel TDS certificates for vendors o Post and clear withholding tax on clearing accounts (Extended Withholding Tax only) o Print TDS certificates for customers

In reporting, the TDS Manager can:

o Prepare annual returns for TDS (Classic TDS and Extended Withholding Tax) o Prepare MIS report (Extended Withholding Tax)

SAP_CIN_TDS_SUPERVISOR - This role covers the administrative activities in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to tax deducted at source (TDS). It includes all day-to-day operations and reporting, but not Customizing.

In day-to-day operations, the TDS Supervisor can:

o Carry out all the activities relating to the remittance of tax withholdings o Make adjustment postings o Print and cancel TDS certificates for vendors o Post and clear withholding tax on clearing accounts (extended withholding tax only) o Print TDS certificates for customers

In reporting, you can:

o Prepare annual returns for TDS (Classic TDS and Extended Withholding Tax) o Prepare MIS report (Extended Withholding Tax) o Archive TDS documents

SAP_CIN_TDS_CLERK - This role covers the day-to-day operations relating to tax deducted at source (TDS).

The TDS Clerk can:

o Carry out all the activities relating to the remittance of tax withholdings (Classic TDS and extended withholding tax)

o Post and clear withholding tax on clearing accounts (extended withholding tax only)

Page 253 of 254

Page 254: Country Version India

COUNTRY VERSION INDIA (CIN)

38Important Notes

0420362 Changes for exports under letter of undertaking XX-CSC-IN-SD

0439373 Utilization of AED and SED from BED XX-CSC-IN-SD

0408158 Excise Invoice Popup in MIGO for CIN40A XX-CSC-IN-MM

0448967 CIN Messages during goods movement not releva XX-CSC-IN-MM

0448497 TDS posting optimization and record level locking XX-CSC-IN-FI

0046363 Withholding Tax rounding for India XX-CSC-IN-FI

0426491 Evaluated Receipt Settlement with EWT XX-CSC-IN-FI

0422117 TDS certificate printing optimization XX-CSC-IN-FI

0442375 TDS posting optimization and record level locking XX-CSC-IN-FI

0081456 CRTs for country version India (CIN) XX-CSC-IN

0438190 New area menu for India Version in CIN 40A XX-CSC-IN

0409687 Additions to upgrade to CIN 40A for 4.6C SR2 XX-CSC-IN

0422423 CRT's for CIN XX-CSC-IN

0411079 Post installation activities XX-CSC-IN

0399964 Release notes CIN40A XX-CSC-IN

0423476 CIN40A with other Add-Ons XX-CSC-IN

0420712 Global installations with India and Thailand XX-CSC-IN

Page 254 of 254